Barco Laser Pointer 26 0405000 00 User Manual
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff»  
rëÉêÛë=dìáÇÉ  
•
•
Manual # 26-0405000-00  
Revision A  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
agreed upon in the contract, all guarantee claims of the purchaser will be rendered invalid.  
Not included in the guarantee coverage are system failures which are attributed to  
programs or special electronic circuitry provided by the purchaser, e.g. interfaces. Normal  
wear as well as normal maintenance are not subject to the guarantee provided by Barco  
either.  
The environmental conditions as well as the servicing and maintenance regulations  
specified in this manual must be complied with by the customer.  
qê~ÇÉã~êâë  
Brand and product names mentioned in this manual may be trademarks, registered  
trademarks or copyrights of their respective holders. All brand and product names  
mentioned in this manual serve as comments or examples and are not to be understood as  
advertising for the products or their manufactures.  
`çãé~åó=^ÇÇêÉëë  
Barco Events USA  
11101 Trade Center Drive  
Rancho Cordova, California 95670  
USA  
•
•
•
Phone: (916) 859-2500  
Fax: (916) 859-2515  
Websites:  
~
~
www.folsom.com  
www.events.barco.com  
Barco N.V.  
Noordlaan 5  
8520 Kuurne  
BELGIUM  
•
•
•
Phone: +32 56.36.82.11  
Fax: +32 56.35.16.51  
Website: www.barco.com  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
léÉê~íçêë=p~ÑÉíó=pìãã~êó  
The general safety information in this summary is for operating personnel.  
aç=kçí=oÉãçîÉ=`çîÉêë=çê=m~åÉäë  
There are no user-serviceable parts within the unit. Removal of the top cover will expose  
dangerous voltages. To avoid personal injury, do not remove the top cover. Do not operate  
the unit without the cover installed.  
mçïÉê=pçìêÅÉ  
This product is intended to operate from a power source that will not apply more than 230  
volts rms between the supply conductors or between both supply conductor and ground. A  
protective ground connection by way of grounding conductor in the power cord is essential  
for safe operation.  
dêçìåÇáåÖ=íÜÉ=mêçÇìÅí  
This product is grounded through the grounding conductor of the power cord. To avoid  
electrical shock, plug the power cord into a properly wired receptacle before connecting to  
the product input or output terminals. A protective-ground connection by way of the  
grounding conductor in the power cord is essential for safe operation.  
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=mçïÉê=`çêÇ  
Use only the power cord and connector specified for your product. Use only a power cord  
that is in good condition. Refer cord and connector changes to qualified service personnel.  
rëÉ=íÜÉ=mêçéÉê=cìëÉ  
To avoid fire hazard, use only the fuse having identical type, voltage rating, and current  
rating characteristics. Refer fuse replacement to qualified service personnel.  
aç=kçí=léÉê~íÉ=áå=bñéäçëáîÉ=^íãçëéÜÉêÉë  
To avoid explosion, do not operate this product in an explosive atmosphere.  
iv  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
qÉêãë=få=qÜáë=j~åì~ä=~åÇ=bèìáéãÉåí=j~êâáåÖ=  
t^okfkd  
Highlights an operating procedure, practice, condition, statement, etc., which, if not strictly  
observed, could result in injury to or death of personnel.  
Highlights an essential operating procedure, condition or  
statement.  
Note  
`^rqflk  
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the  
presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature  
accompanying the appliance.  
^sboqfppbjbkq>  
Le point d´exclamation dans un triangle equilatéral signale à alerter l´utilisateur qu´il y a  
des instructions d´operation et d´entretien tres importantes dans la litérature qui  
accompagne l´appareil.  
slopf`eq  
Ein Ausrufungszeichen innerhalb eines gleichwinkeligen Dreiecks dient dazu, den  
Benutzer auf wichtige Bedienungs-und Wartungsanweisungen in der Dem Great  
beiliegenden Literatur aufmerksam zu machen.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
`Ü~åÖÉ=eáëíçêó  
The table below lists the changes to the PresentationPRO-II User’s Guide.  
Table 0-1. Change History  
Rev  
Date  
ECO #  
Description  
Approved By  
A
11/17/05  
1502  
New PresentationPRO-II User’s Guide  
Andreas Yerocostas  
vi  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë  
`Ü~éíÉê=N  
fåíêçÇìÅíáçå =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K= N  
Chapter Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1  
How to Use This Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Navigating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Table of Contents and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2  
Terms and Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3  
System Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
PresentationPRO-II High Performance Switcher. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
PresentationPRO-II Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4  
A Word About Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6  
Effect Combinations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Mixer Effect 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Mixer Effect 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8  
Mixer Effect 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Mixer Effect 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Mixer Effect 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9  
Mixer Effect 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10  
`Ü~éíÉê=O  
`Ü~éíÉê=P  
e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=NN  
In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12  
Analog Input Flexibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14  
PresentationPRO-II Front Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15  
Use of Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Front Panel Sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16  
Touch Screen Menu Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17  
Source Selection Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18  
Layer Functions Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19  
e~êÇï~êÉ=fåëí~ää~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=ON  
In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21  
Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Unpacking and Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Site Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Rack-Mount Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22  
Cable and Adapter Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23  
Input Connection Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24  
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
`Ü~éíÉê=Q  
jÉåì=lêáÉåí~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=OT  
In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27  
Home Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Global Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28  
Input Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Input Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29  
Input Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Input Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30  
Input Pre and Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32  
Input Acquisition Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33  
Input Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34  
Sizing Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35  
Color Balance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37  
Aspect Ratio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38  
Output Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Output Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39  
Output Menu Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Output Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40  
Output Sub Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41  
Test Pattern Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42  
System Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
System Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43  
System Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
System Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44  
System Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Diagnostics Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45  
Reset Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48  
Software Version Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49  
Console Port Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50  
EDID DVI Input Format Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51  
Technical Support Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52  
Effects Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53  
Status Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54  
Display Settings Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55  
Keypad Backlight Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56  
PIP Adjustment Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
PIP Adjustment Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57  
PIP Adjustment Menu Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
PIP Adjustment Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58  
PIP Adjustment Sub Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59  
Border Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60  
Crop Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61  
Shadow Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62  
Image Effects Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63  
Key Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Key Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65  
Key Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Key Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66  
Key Sub Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67  
Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68  
Key Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69  
viii  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Input Source Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Input Source Adjustment Menu Tree. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71  
Input Source Adjustment Menu Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Input Source Adjustment Menu Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Background/DSK Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76  
Background Matte Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77  
DSK Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78  
DSK Matte Adjustment Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79  
Frame Grab Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80  
LOGO Input Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82  
Remote Control Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83  
`Ü~éíÉê=R  
póëíÉã=pÉíìéK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=UR  
In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85  
Setup Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86  
Return to Factory Default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Touch Screen Calibration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87  
Output Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Projector Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88  
Quick Input Setup Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89  
Comprehensive Input Setup. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90  
Setting up the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Programming EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93  
Using a Matte Color as the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Using the DVI Input as the Background. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94  
Using a Still Frame as the Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95  
Setting up the DSK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Using the DVI Input as the DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96  
Using a Still Frame as the DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97  
Setting up the LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
Saving the Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98  
`Ü~éíÉê=S  
léÉê~íáçåë =K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=VV  
In This Chapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99  
Prerequisites. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100  
Operational Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Monitor Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Touch Screen Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
A Word About LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101  
Working with Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Working with PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Transitioning a PIP to Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102  
Removing a PIP from Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Cancelling a PIP Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Changing a PIP to a KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103  
Modifying PIPs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Working with Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Transitioning a Key to Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105  
Removing a Key from Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Cancelling a Key Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Changing a KEY to a PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106  
Modifying Keys and DSKs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107  
Background and DSK Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Setting the Background Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108  
Transitioning to a Matte Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Transitioning to a Live DVI Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Transitioning to a Still Frame. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109  
Keying the DVI source in DSK Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Keying a Still Frame in DSK Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110  
Changing Background Matte Colors in DSK Mode . . . . . . . 111  
Cancelling a Background or DSK Transition. . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
Clearing a Background or DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111  
LOGO Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Transitioning the LOGO to Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Clearing the LOGO from Program. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
Working with Layer Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Using Full Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Using Freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Using Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
Working with Transitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Using Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Capturing Still Frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Still Frame Capture Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Capturing Still Frames from the Background Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
Capturing Still Frames from a PIP or Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118  
Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119  
^ééÉåÇáñ=^=  
péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåëK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNON  
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121  
Scaled Video Channel Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Unscaled Background/DSK Input Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122  
Output Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123  
Physical and Electrical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124  
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
DVI Connector Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125  
Analog 15-pin D Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126  
Ethernet Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127  
Serial Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128  
Input and Output Resolutions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129  
^ééÉåÇáñ=_=  
`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNPP  
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
x
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
Return Material Authorization (RMA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133  
Contact Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134  
^ééÉåÇáñ=`=  
fåÇÉñ  
réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉK=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNPR  
In This Appendix. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135  
Software Upgrade Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Serial Upgrade Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136  
Ethernet Upgrade Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139  
Troubleshooting Ethernet Communications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145  
=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=K=KNQT  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
xii  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
This chapter is designed to introduce you to the PresentationPRO-II. Areas to be covered  
are:  
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter Structure  
How to Use This Guide  
Conventions  
Terms and Definitions  
System Overview  
`Ü~éíÉê=píêìÅíìêÉ  
The following chapters provide instructions for all aspects of PresentationPRO-II  
operations:  
•
•
•
•
•
Chapter 1, “Introduction” provides a system overview, a list of features, and  
discusses easy ways to use this guide.  
Chapter 2, “Hardware Orientation” explains the PresentationPRO-II’s front and  
rear panels in detail.  
Chapter 3, “Hardware Installation” provides comprehensive system installation  
instructions.  
Chapter 4, “Menu Orientation” explains the system’s configuration, setup and  
adjustment menus, and provides basic menu “navigation” procedures.  
Chapter 5, “System Setup” outlines procedures for setting up and configuring the  
PresentationPRO-II.  
•
•
Chapter 6, “Operations” provides basic system operating instructions.  
Appendix A, “Specifications” lists the PresentationPRO-II’s input, output, video,  
mechanical and power specifications, and includes connector pinouts.  
•
Appendix B, “Contact Information” lists important contact, RMA, warranty and  
technical support details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
How to Use This Guide  
eçï=íç=rëÉ=qÜáë=dìáÇÉ  
Following are important tips for streamlining your use of this User’s Guide in its electronic  
“PDF” form.  
k~îáÖ~íáåÖ  
Use Acrobat Reader’s “bookmarks” to navigate to the desired location. All chapter files  
have the same bookmark structure for instant navigation to any section. Please note:  
•
•
Extensive hyperlinks are provided within the chapters.  
Use Acrobat’s “Go to Previous View” and “Return to Next View” buttons to trace  
your complete navigational path.  
•
•
Use the “Previous Page” and “Next Page” buttons to go to the previous or next  
page within a file.  
Use Acrobat’s extensive search capabilities, such as the “Find” tool and “Search  
Index” tool to perform comprehensive searches as required.  
q~ÄäÉ=çÑ=`çåíÉåíë=~åÇ=fåÇÉñ  
Use the Table of Contents bookmarks to navigate a desired topic. Click any item to  
instantly jump to that section of the guide. You can also use the Index to jump to specific  
topics within a chapter. Each page number in the Index is a hyperlink.  
`çåîÉåíáçåë=  
The following conventions are used throughout this guide:  
•
•
•
The symbol „ denotes an operations procedure.  
The symbol S denotes an example.  
Entries written in bold-face letters denote physical buttons or rear chassis  
connectors.  
S Press PIP to ...  
•
•
When two buttons together are required for an operation or function, the plus (+)  
sign is used between the buttons. This procedure requires that you hold down the  
first button, then press the second.  
Button labels on the Touch Screen menus are shown in bold uppercase letters  
between braces.  
S Press {BORDER} to …  
•
When a sequence of menu selections is required to complete a given procedure,  
the ">" symbol is used to divide each successive menu picks.  
S To access the Sizing Menu, press {HOME} > {INPUT} > {SIZING}.  
2
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
Terms and Definitions  
qÉêãë=~åÇ=aÉÑáåáíáçåë  
The following terms and definitions are used throughout this guide:  
•
A “Background” is an unscaled source, typically originating from a computer.  
PresentationPRO-II enables you to work with one background source which  
appears at the system’s lowest priority — visually in back of all other sources.  
•
•
The abbreviation “BG” is also used throughout this guide for Background.  
A “Key” is an electronic (and visual) process whereby one image is electronically  
superimposed over another source or a background. Keys are typically used for  
titles and banners.  
•
•
•
A “Layer” is an image display element (such as a PIP, Key or Background) that  
has an associated visual priority — either in front (or in back) of another layer.  
A “LOGO” is a full screen image that is selected from one of three still frames that  
you can capture with PresentationPRO-II.  
A “Mixer” is the electronic circuitry that enables you to transition (and scale) PIPs  
and Keys over a background. PresentationPRO-II has one internal mixer, capable  
of layering either one PIP or one key.  
•
•
“Operator” refers to the person who uses the system.  
“PIP” refers to Picture-in-Picture, an on-screen effect in which one “scaled” picture  
(typically of reduced size) is positioned over a background image. PIPs can be  
reduced, enlarged, bordered, shadowed, and mixed on and off Program.  
•
•
•
“Screen” and “Menu” both refer to the Touch Screen menus.  
“System” refers to the PresentationPRO-II.  
A “Scaler” is the electronic circuitry that enables you to reduce or enlarge source  
images, thus creating PIPs and Keys that can be positioned (and transitioned).  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
póëíÉã=lîÉêîáÉï  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
PresentationPRO-II High Performance Switcher  
PresentationPRO-II Features  
A Word About Layers  
Effect Combinations  
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff eáÖÜ=mÉêÑçêã~åÅÉ=pïáíÅÜÉê  
The PresentationPRO-II is a compact switching system that simplifies the task of  
supporting professional quality visual presentations, such as live events and presentations  
in corporate boardrooms and church services. PresentationPRO-II is offered in two  
configurations — SDI and HD.  
•
The SDI Model offers eight analog inputs on HD-15 connectors, one unscaled  
high-resolution DVI input for a background or Downstream Key (DSK) source,  
plus one SD-SDI input.  
•
The HD Model also offers eight analog inputs, one DVI input (for a background or  
DSK source), plus one SD-SDI/HD-SDI input.  
Each model combines an eight-input video router, Barco’s high performance proprietary  
Athena scaler, and a full-featured control panel in a single integrated package. The eight  
universal analog inputs accept standard component and composite analog video formats  
(NTSC, PAL, SECAM), computer resolutions up to UXGA, analog HD formats including  
720p, 1080i, 1080p and Plasma display resolutions.  
The Barco Athena scaler features 1:1 pixel sampling, motion adaptive de-interlacing for  
both standard and high definition sources, 3:2 and 2:2 pull down detection, low video delay  
and aspect ratio correction. The operator can also capture and store still frames for use as  
a background, DSK or LOGO source.  
Each unit incorporates one analog and one DVI output, and supports output computer  
resolutions up to 1600x1200, analog HDTV resolutions (including 720p and 1080p) and  
Plasma display resolutions.  
PresentationPRO-II uses three image layers to produce effects:  
•
•
•
One unscaled live background or DSK layer (shared resource)  
One scaled layer  
One LOGO layer  
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff=cÉ~íìêÉë  
Following is a detailed list of PresentationPRO-II features:  
•
Barco Proprietary Processing  
~
~
~
~
10-bit processing with 1:1 pixel sampling  
Motion adaptive de-interlacing  
3:2 and 2:2 pull down detect  
Image cropping and aspect ratio correction  
4
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Low video processing delay, less than 3 input fields  
Capture and storage of still frames for use as a background, DSK or LOGO  
SD-SDI input (SDI Model)  
SD-SDI/HD-SDI Input (HD model)  
Support for input and output resolutions up to UXGA  
High quality motion adaptive de-interlacing on SD and HD sources  
Analog and DVI program outputs  
2RU rack-mount chassis  
Native high-resolution background/DSK channel independent of the PIP/Key  
processing channel  
•
•
Internal 8 x 1 analog video router for selecting scaler input  
PIP effects:  
~
~
~
PIP size from 1/8 to 8x source resolution  
Adjustable PIP aspect ratio  
PIP borders, including drop shadows and soft edge  
•
•
•
Transitioning PIP or Key over a background  
Numerous wipe effects, programmable matte color  
Keying  
~
~
Luminance key  
Color key  
•
•
Three assignable, internal frame stores  
Output synchronization: free-run or vertically locked to NTSC/PAL black burst,  
CSync or HD tri-level sync  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=i~óÉêë  
PresentationPRO-II is a three layer system, but because the DVI input is shared between  
Background and DSK (and only one can be used at a time), the allocation of the layers is  
still very flexible:  
Background (DVI)  
Mixer  
LOGO  
Figure 1-1. PresentationPRO-II Layers, Example 1  
In the layer example above, the DVI input is used as a background, thus the DSK cannot  
be used. Here, users can layer a PIP or Key over the live DVI background, and place the  
full-screen LOGO on top.  
In the layer example below, the DVI input is used as a DSK, thus it cannot be used as a live  
background. However, if the background layer is configured as a matte color, users can  
layer a PIP or Key over the matte background, use the DSK on top, and place the full-  
screen LOGO at the highest priority.  
Background (Matte)  
Mixer  
DSK  
LOGO  
Figure 1-2. PresentationPRO-II Layers, Example 2  
6
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
A layer is defined as an image display element (such as a background, PIP or Key) with an  
associated visual priority. The mixer itself has one layer, which can be assigned to either  
PIP or Key functionality.  
A typical PresentationPRO-II application is illustrated below.  
Background (Matte)  
PIP  
DSK  
Wilderness  
Figure 1-3. Layer Illustration — Background, Mixer and DSK  
Please note the following important points:  
•
•
•
•
The full screen LOGO is the highest priority layer. This image visually appears  
“over” all other layers.  
The Downstream Key (DSK) is the second highest priority layer. It visually  
appears over the mixer and the background — but it is “under” the LOGO.  
The high resolution Background is the lowest priority layer, which appears  
“behind” all other layers.  
Within the mixer, a PIP appears “over” the background and “under” the DSK and  
LOGO. Effects include mixes, wipes, resizing, adjustable aspect ratio, borders,  
drop shadows and soft edges.  
•
•
Within the mixer, a Key also appears “over” the background and “under” the DSK  
and LOGO. Effects include luminance key, reverse (invert) key, and color key  
(graphics).  
Up to eight analog inputs and one SD-SDI or HD-SDI input can be scaled to  
produce PIP or Key effects.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
bÑÑÉÅí=`çãÄáå~íáçåë  
This section illustrates the many (but not all) combinations of image effects that you can  
create on the PresentationPRO-II. Please note:  
•
•
In the following illustrations, the specific layers used in creating each effect are  
labeled (e.g., PIP, Key).  
The symbol ↓↑ denotes a PIP, key or DSK that can transition.  
S Example: PIP ↓↑ indicates that you can dissolve a PIP up or down over a  
background.  
The PresentationPRO-II system provides one background, one scalable layer, a DSK and  
a full screen LOGO. The LOGO, DSK and background are always unscaled.  
If the DSK is in use, a live DVI background cannot be used.  
This occurs because the BG/DSK Input is shared between  
the DSK and the Background.  
Important  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=N  
This effect includes a live (DVI) background and one transitioning PIP.  
Background (DVI)  
PIP ↑↓  
Figure 1-4. Effect 1 Diagram  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=O  
This transition is similar to effect 1. Here, you can transition a Key up or down over the live  
(DVI) background.  
Background (DVI)  
Key ↑↓  
Figure 1-5. Effect 2 Diagram  
8
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=P  
In this effect, because the DSK is in use, the background must be configured as a matte  
color. Here, you can transition the DSK over a scaled PIP and the background matte.  
Background (Matte)  
PIP  
DSK ↑↓  
Figure 1-6. Effect 3 Diagram  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=Q  
This transition is similar to effect 3. Here, you can transition the DSK over a scaled Key  
and the background matte.  
Background (Matte)  
Key  
DSK ↑↓  
Figure 1-7. Effect 4 Diagram  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=R  
In this effect, the background is configured as a Still Frame, and thus the DSK cannot be  
used. Here, you can transition a scaled PIP over a captured still frame.  
Background (Still Frame)  
PIP ↑↓  
Figure 1-8. Effect 5 Diagram  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
NK==fåíêçÇìÅíáçå  
System Overview  
jáñÉê=bÑÑÉÅí=S  
In this effect, the background is configured as a matte color. Here, you can transition a  
scaled PIP under the DSK.  
Background (Matte)  
PIP ↑↓  
DSK  
Figure 1-9. Effect 6 Diagram  
10  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OK==e~êÇï~êÉ=lêáÉåí~íáçå  
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê  
This chapter provides detailed information about the PresentationPRO-II’s hardware. The  
following topics are discussed:  
•
•
•
•
PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel  
PresentationPRO-II Front Panel  
Use of Color  
Front Panel Sections  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Hardware Orientation  
PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel  
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff=oÉ~ê=m~åÉä  
The figure below illustrates the PresentationPRO-II rear panel:  
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Figure 2-1. PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel  
1)  
2)  
3)  
SDI Input  
4)  
5)  
6)  
Program Outputs  
Ethernet Port  
7)  
Serial Ports  
Analog Inputs  
Background/DSK Input  
AC Connector  
Following are descriptions of each rear panel connector and section.  
1) SDI Input  
One BNC connector is provided for an SD-SDI/HD-SDI input (HD model) or an  
SD-SDI input (SDI model). This input is directly associated with the SDI source  
button on the front panel’s top row.  
Users can set the input to accept the following:  
~
~
SDI (SMPTE 259M-C, NTSC or PAL). SDI and HD models.  
HD-SDI (SMPTE 292M, HDTV). HD model only.  
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Comprehensive Input Setup” section on page 90 for  
input setup instructions.  
2) Analog Inputs  
Eight 15-pin D connectors are provided for Analog Inputs. These numbered  
inputs feed the system’s internal 8 x 1 analog router, and correspond directly to  
the eight analog source buttons on the front panel.  
Please note:  
~
In Appendix A, refer to the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on  
page 126 for pinout details.  
~
Refer to the “Analog Input Flexibility” section on page 14 for additional  
information about each analog input connector.  
12  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2. Hardware Orientation  
PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel  
3) Background/DSK Input  
One DVI connector is provided for a Background or a DSK Input. The connector  
accepts only digital video. Please note:  
~
~
~
Using the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu, the connector’s mode can be set  
to either BG (background) or DSK (downstream key)  
In the BG mode, users can choose between the live DVI input, a matte  
color or a captured still frame.  
In the DSK mode, users can choose between the live DVI input or a  
captured still frame.  
In DSK mode, the background matte color is still available as  
a source, and the color itself can be set from the BG Matte  
Menu.  
Important  
In Appendix A, refer to the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on page 125 for  
pinout details.  
4) Program Outputs  
Two connectors are provided for Program Outputs:  
~
One DVI connector is provided for the Digital Program Output. This  
output is designed for a digital connection to your projector. The output  
is digital only, and does not include analog pins. In Appendix A, refer to  
the “DVI Connector Pinouts” section on page 125 for pinout details.  
~
One 15-pin D connector is provided for the Analog Program Output.  
This output (identical in content to the digital output) is designed for an  
analog connection to your projector — or to an analog monitor. In  
Appendix A, see the “Analog 15-pin D Connector” section on page 126  
for pinouts.  
5) Ethernet Port  
One RJ-45 connector is provided for 10/100BaseT Ethernet communications.  
When (optionally) connecting the PresentationPRO-II to an external controller, a  
standard Ethernet hub or switch on an isolated network is recommended. The  
Ethernet connector is compatible with:  
~
~
Standard RJ-45 Ethernet cables  
Neutrik EtherCon® series cables  
In Appendix A, refer to the “Ethernet Connector” section on page 127 for pinout  
details.  
6) AC Connector  
One AC Connector is provided to connect the PresentationPRO-II to your  
facility’s AC power source. The integral switch turns the chassis on and off.  
7) Serial Ports  
Two 9-pin D connectors are provided for RS-232 serial communications with the  
PresentationPRO-II chassis and for downloading code in the field. In Appendix A,  
refer to the “Serial Connector” section on page 128 for pinout details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
2. Hardware Orientation  
PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel  
^å~äçÖ=fåéìí=cäÉñáÄáäáíó  
Each analog input connector accepts a variety of analog formats including VGA, low-  
resolution composite video, S-video and YUV component video.  
•
•
For RGB with H and V sync, use the VGA connector directly.  
Using a VGA (HD-15) to 5xBNC breakout cable, five input combinations are  
possible. Cells with check marks denote the connections required for the  
indicated format.  
Table 2-1. Analog Input Combinations using Breakout Cable  
Breakout Cable  
Wire Color  
Composite  
Video  
S-Video  
(Y/C)  
YUV  
(YPbPr)  
RGB  
Sync on Green  
RGB  
Comp Sync  
RGB  
Separate H V  
R
3 (Pr)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 (Chrom)  
3 (Lum)  
G
3 (Lum)  
3 (Pb)  
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
H Sync  
V Sync  
14  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Hardware Orientation  
PresentationPRO-II Front Panel  
mêÉëÉåí~íáçåmolJff=cêçåí=m~åÉä  
The figure below illustrates the PresentationPRO-II front panel:  
1
3
4
2
5
Figure 2-1. PresentationPRO-II Front Panel  
1)  
2)  
Chassis Handles  
3)  
Layer Functions Section  
Source Selection Bus  
5)  
PresentationPRO-II Model  
Touch Screen Menu Section 4)  
Following are descriptions of each front panel control feature:  
1) Chassis Handles  
Two Chassis Handles are provided for ease of installation and transportation.  
2) Touch Screen Menu Section  
The Touch Screen Menu Section is used for system configuration, setup and  
operational adjustments of PIPs and keys. Refer to the “Touch Screen Menu  
Section” heading on page 17 for details.  
3) Layer Functions Section  
The Layer Functions Section is the operational heart of the PresentationPRO-II,  
enabling you to select layers, modes, and perform transitions. Refer to the “Layer  
Functions Section” heading on page 19 for details.  
4) Source Selection Bus  
The Source Selection Bus allows you to choose the PIP or Key source.  
~
On the SDI model, up to eight analog sources plus one SD-SDI source  
can be routed to the PIP or Key.  
~
On the HD model, up to eight analog sources plus one HD-SDI/SD-SDI  
source can be routed to the PIP or Key.  
Refer to the “Source Selection Bus” section on page 18 for details.  
5) PresentationPRO-II Model  
This section displays the PresentationPRO-II model, either SDI or HD.  
HD-SDI  
SDI  
Figure 2-2. PresentationPRO-II Model Labels  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                         
2. Hardware Orientation  
Use of Color  
rëÉ=çÑ=`çäçê  
Color plays an important “visual” role with the PresentationPRO-II’s front panel buttons:  
White buttons are used for sources.  
1
Yellow buttons are used for functions and modes. A yellow button always applies to the  
active (blinking) layer. These functions include assigning a PIP or key to the active layer,  
resetting or clearing the layer, and freezing the active layer. Yellow buttons are also used to  
select both scaled sources (Key, PIP) and unscaled sources (LOGO).  
PIP  
The Red button is used for transitions.  
TRANS  
BG/DSK  
The Green button indicates the unscaled input source, which is shared between the  
background and the DSK.  
cêçåí=m~åÉä=pÉÅíáçåë  
This section provides detailed descriptions and illustrations of each front panel section.  
The following topics are discussed:  
•
•
•
Touch Screen Menu Section  
Source Selection Bus  
Layer Functions Section  
16  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Hardware Orientation  
Front Panel Sections  
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=jÉåì=pÉÅíáçå  
The figure below illustrates the Touch Screen Menu Section. A sample menu is also  
shown for reference.  
PIP ADJUSTMENT  
H
O
M
E
H Size < 37.3% >  
V Size < 58.9% >  
H Position  
674  
452  
-34  
70  
N
A
V
S
R
C
V Position  
B
O
R
D
E
R
A
D
J
C
R
O
P
TRACK SIZE  
3
1
2
Figure 2-3. Touch Screen Menu Section  
1)  
Touch Screen  
2)  
Rotary Knobs  
Following are descriptions of each area:  
1) Touch Screen  
All menus and functions can be accessed by touching (pressing) the desired label  
or button on the Touch Screen itself.  
S Example: Press the {BORDER} button to access the Border Menu.  
S Example: Press the V Size line to highlight that line. You can now adjust  
V Size using the ADJ rotary knob.  
2) Rotary Knobs  
Two Rotary Knobs are provided to the right of the Touch Screen. Each knob  
controls the function that is labeled on the Touch Screen itself, immediately  
adjacent to the knob. Please note:  
~
The Top Knob is generally assigned to navigating fields on the selected  
menu. For example, turning the knob moves a highlight up and down a  
list of parameters, allowing you to adjust the highlighted function. This  
knob also adjusts adjacent parameters.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
2. Hardware Orientation  
Front Panel Sections  
~
The Bottom knob is used to adjust the adjacent parameter, as labeled  
on the Touch Screen.  
There is no Enter button. If you adjust a value with the  
knobs, that function or value is immediately active.  
Important  
pçìêÅÉ=pÉäÉÅíáçå=_ìë  
The figure below illustrates the Source Selection Bus.  
Source Selection  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
SDI  
Figure 2-4. Source Selection Bus  
Each button represents an input that you can assign to a PIP or a key.  
•
•
Buttons 1 through 8 correspond to the eight analog inputs on the rear panel.  
The SDI button corresponds to the SD-SDI input (SDI Model) or the SD-SDI / HD-  
SDI input (HD Model) on the rear panel.  
Press a button on the Source Selection Bus to assign the source to the blinking PIP or  
Key effect in the Layer Functions Section.  
•
A source button that is blinking indicates that the source is “pending.” It has been  
assigned as the next PIP or Key source, and can be taken to Program with the  
next transition.  
•
•
When a source button is lit solid, the source is on Program. It cannot be modified  
until its associated PIP or Key button is pressed and blinking.  
One solid source (Program) and one blinking source (pending) can appear on the  
Source Selection Bus simultaneously.  
In Chapter 5, refer to the “Comprehensive Input Setup” section on page 90 for details on  
all source setup procedures.  
18  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2. Hardware Orientation  
Front Panel Sections  
i~óÉê=cìåÅíáçåë=pÉÅíáçå  
The figure below illustrates the Layer Functions Section.  
FULL  
SCREEN  
BG/DSK  
PIP  
KEY  
LOGO  
CLEAR  
FREEZE  
RESET  
TRANS  
Layer Functions  
Figure 2-5. Layer Functions Section  
The buttons in the Layer Functions Section enable you to control the layers and effects  
that transition to and from Program.  
Please note the following important points:  
•
The buttons are arranged from left-to-right in order of visual priority — from the  
background (at the lowest priority) to the LOGO (at the highest visual priority).  
•
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to “pend” one transition at a time,  
such as a PIP or Key transition, a background, DSK or LOGO transition, or a  
“clear” function.  
•
Because the mixer has a single scaler, you cannot transition a PIP and a Key  
simultaneously. With a PIP on Program, however, you can “pend” a Key. When  
TRANS is pressed, the PIP transitions off and the Key transitions on. Similarly, if  
a Key is on Program, you can pend a PIP.  
Remember that a live Background and the DSK are mutually  
exclusive. This occurs because the BG/DSK Input is shared.  
Note  
Following are descriptions of each button’s function.  
Background/DSK Button — press to pend either a Background or a DSK transition,  
depending on how the button’s mode is configured (on the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu).  
The button blinks when selected, and the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu appears on the  
Touch Screen. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Background/DSK Input Setup Menu” section  
on page 74 for details.  
BG/DSK  
PIP — press to pend a PIP transition or modify the active PIP. The button blinks when  
selected, and the PIP Adjustment Menu appears on the Touch Screen. In Chapter 4,  
refer to the “PIP Adjustment Menu” section on page 57 for details.  
PIP  
KEY — press to pend a Key transition or modify the active Key. The button blinks when  
selected, and the Key Adjustment Menu appears on the Touch Screen. In Chapter 4,  
refer to the “Key Menu” section on page 65 for details. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Working  
with Layers” section on page 102 for complete instructions on all PIP and key modes.  
KEY  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
2. Hardware Orientation  
Front Panel Sections  
LOGO — press to pend a LOGO transition or select the LOGO source. The button blinks  
when selected and the Logo Input Setup Menu appears on the Touch Screen. In  
Chapter 4, refer to the “LOGO Input Setup Menu” section on page 82 for details.  
LOGO  
Please note:  
•
The logo is the system’s highest priority layer, to which you can assign one of  
PresentationPRO-II’s three internal frame stores.  
•
The LOGO layer is often used as a “black preview” function. If Black is selected  
as the “type” on the Logo Input Setup menu, you can fade to black at any time by  
pending a LOGO transition.  
•
The logo is not a live input, and does not have an associated key signal.  
All layers are maintained underneath the LOGO. For  
example, if you have a PIP and a DSK on Program when you  
transition to the LOGO, when you mix the LOGO off — the  
previous "look" is still there.  
Important  
FULL SCREEN — press to take the selected (blinking) PIP or Key to full screen. In each  
case, the source’s height will be used as the parameter that defines the full screen size.  
FULL  
SCREEN  
S Example: If a source’s original dimension is 1280 x 1024, pressing FULL  
SCREEN expands (or reduces) that PIP to fill the output screen vertically. If  
borders are ON, they will be taken into account so that they are visible.  
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Using Full Screen” section on page 114 for instructions.  
CLEAR — press to “pend” the removal of the currently selected (blinking) layer from  
Program — in the next transition. For example, you can “clear” a PIP, Key, still frame  
background, DSK or LOGO. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Working with Layers” section on  
page 102 for instructions.  
CLEAR  
FREEZE — press to freeze the selected (blinking) PIP or Key on Program. In Chapter 6,  
refer to the “Using Freeze” section on page 114 for instructions.  
FREEZE  
RESET — press to reset the current effect (e.g., PIP, Key, crop, etc.) to a nominal default  
value. You can think of this function as being “context sensitive” — as it resets only the  
current effect, without affecting other modifications.  
RESET  
S Example: If you adjust a PIP’s size, border and shadow, and wish to reset  
only the border, navigate to the Border Menu and press Reset.  
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Using Reset” section on page 114 for details.  
TRANS — press to transition the pending layer(s) to or from Program — using either a mix  
or wipe. The wipe patterns, edge types and transition rates are selected using the Effects  
Menu.  
TRANS  
•
•
In Chapter 4, refer to the “Effects Menu” section on page 53 for menu details.  
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Working with Transitions” section on page 115 for  
operational procedures.  
20  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
PK==e~êÇï~êÉ=fåëí~ää~íáçå  
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê  
This chapter provides comprehensive installation instructions for the PresentationPRO-II  
system’s hardware. The following topics are discussed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Safety Precautions  
Unpacking and Inspection  
Site Preparation  
Rack-Mount Installation  
Cable and Adapter Information  
Input Connection Chart  
Installation  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Hardware Installation  
Safety Precautions  
p~ÑÉíó=mêÉÅ~ìíáçåë=  
For all PresentationPRO-II installation procedures, please observe the following important  
safety and handling rules to avoid damage to yourself and the equipment:  
•
•
To protect users from electric shock, ensure that the chassis connects to earth via  
the ground wire provided in the AC power Cord.  
The AC Socket-outlet should be installed near the equipment and be easily  
accessible.  
råé~ÅâáåÖ=~åÇ=fåëéÉÅíáçå=  
Before opening the PresentationPRO-II shipping box, inspect it for damage. If you find any  
damage, notify the shipping carrier immediately for all claims adjustments. As you open  
the box, compare its contents against the packing slip. If you find any shortages, contact  
your sales representative.  
Once you have removed all the components from their packaging and checked that all the  
listed components are present, visually inspect the system to ensure there was no damage  
during shipping. If there is damage, notify the shipping carrier immediately for all claims  
adjustments.  
páíÉ=mêÉé~ê~íáçå=  
The environment in which you install your PresentationPRO-II should be clean, properly lit,  
free from static, and have adequate power, ventilation, and space for all components.  
o~ÅâJjçìåí=fåëí~ää~íáçå  
The PresentationPRO-II chassis is designed to be rack mounted and is supplied with front  
rack-mount hardware. Rear rack-mount brackets are available as a kit and are  
recommended for use when units are mounted in transit cases.  
The PresentationPRO-II chassis can also be used in a  
“tabletop” configuration, without rack mounting.  
Note  
When rack mounting the PresentationPRO-II chassis, remember the following important  
points:  
•
•
Maximum ambient operating temperature for the unit is 40 degrees C.  
Leave at least one inch of space (front and rear) to ensure that the airflow through  
the fan and vent holes is not restricted.  
•
When installing multiple units into a rack, distribute them evenly to prevent  
hazardous conditions that may be created by uneven weight distribution.  
22  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
3. Hardware Installation  
Cable and Adapter Information  
•
•
Rack mount each PresentationPRO-II chassis from the front rack ears using four  
rack screws (not supplied). Rack threads may be metric or otherwise —  
depending upon the rack type.  
Install the lower of the two mounting holes first.  
`~ÄäÉ=~åÇ=^Ç~éíÉê=fåÑçêã~íáçå  
The table below provides information regarding cables and adapters:  
Table 3-1. PresentationPRO-II System Cables and Adapters  
Cable  
Description  
Note  
Input Connections  
Analog input connectors (via breakout)  
Analog input connections (direct)  
Digital background/DSK connection (direct)  
SD-SDI or HD-SDI input connection  
Analog connections (via breakout)  
Output Connections  
HD-15 to 5xBNC Breakout Cable  
HD-15 to HD-15  
4 Cables Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
DVI to DVI  
Belden 1694A (recommended)  
Belden RG-59 (recommended)  
HD-15 to HD-15  
DVI to DVI  
Analog Program output (direct)  
Digital Program output (direct)  
Remote Connections  
Customer Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
Ethernet Hub or Switch  
RJ-45 Ethernet Cable  
For use with external controller  
For use with external controller  
Power Connections  
Customer Supplied  
Customer Supplied  
AC Power Cord  
AC Power, 7 foot, 10A  
1 Cord Supplied  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3. Hardware Installation  
Input Connection Chart  
fåéìí=`çååÉÅíáçå=`Ü~êí=  
The following Input Connection Chart is provided to assist with your connections. Please  
note the following important points:  
•
•
•
•
•
The mixer has eight analog input connections (scaled), and one SD-SDI input  
(SDI model) or one SD-SDI/HD-SDI input (HD model). Additionally, there is one  
unscaled DVI connection that is shared between background and DSK.  
There is a direct correspondence between the first eight buttons on the Source  
Selection Bus and the eight numbered analog input connections. No additional  
button-to-source configuration is required.  
There is a direct correspondence between the SDI button in the Source  
Selection Bus and the SD-SDI (or SD-SDI/HD-SDI) input connection. No  
additional button-to-source configuration is required.  
The Analog inputs can also be used to connect composite, S-Video (Y/C) and  
component video. In Chapter 2, refer to the “Analog Input Flexibility” section on  
page 14 for details.  
If a DVI source is connected to the BG/DSK input, it can be used for either a live  
background or the DSK (but not both simultaneously). The mode for the BG/DSK  
button (either BG or DSK) is set on the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu.  
Chart instructions:  
•
•
Column 1 lists all input connectors.  
Column 2 lists additional connector details. Remember that the DVI connector is  
digital only. Be sure to check [ 3 ] the desired assignment of BG/DSK input.  
•
•
In Column 3, please list the physical source that supplies the input signal.  
In Column 4, please list any notes or details pertaining to the source.  
Complete the following Input Connection Chart for your system:  
Table 3-2. Input Connection Chart  
Input  
Analog Input 1  
Analog Input 2  
Analog Input 3  
Analog Input 4  
Analog Input 5  
Analog Input 6  
Analog Input 7  
Analog Input 8  
SDI Input  
Input Detail  
Physical Source  
Note  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
Scaled  
• SD-SDI (SDI model), Scaled  
• SD-SDI/HD-HDI (HD model), Scaled  
BG/DSK Input  
Digital, Unscaled - BG [ ] DSK [  
]
24  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Hardware Installation  
Installation  
fåëí~ää~íáçå  
The figure below illustrates a block diagram of a basic PresentationPRO-II system. This  
diagram can be used as reference in the following installation procedure.  
Program  
Projector  
Inputs  
Analog Sources to Analog Inputs 1-8  
SD-SDI Source to SDI Input (SDI Model)  
SD-SDI/HD-SDI Source to SDI Input (HD Model)  
Program Out (Analog)  
Program Out (Digital)  
DVI Source to BG/DSK Input  
Ethernet  
(Optional)  
To External  
Controller  
Ethernet Hub / Switch  
Figure 3-1. Block Diagram, Basic PresentationPRO-II System  
You will need:  
Table 3-3. Equipment List, Basic PresentationPRO-II System  
Qty.  
Item  
Note  
1
PresentationPRO-II Chassis  
Video Projector and cable  
Analog Monitor and cable  
Ethernet Hub or Switch  
Ethernet cables  
1
Customer supplied  
Customer supplied  
1
1
Customer supplied (Optional, with External Controller)  
Customer supplied (Optional, with External Controller)  
Customer supplied (for BG/DSK input)  
2
1
DVI-DVI cable  
1
Video cable  
Customer supplied (for SD-SDI or HD-SDI input)  
Analog video as required (customer supplied)  
TBD  
Dedicated sources  
„
Use the following steps to install PresentationPRO-II:  
1. Follow the unpacking procedures as listed in the “Unpacking and Inspection”  
section on page 22.  
2. As required, refer to the “Physical and Electrical Specifications” section on  
page 124 in Appendix A for electrical and mechanical details.  
3. As required, refer to the “PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel” section on page 12 in  
Chapter 2 for the locations of all connectors.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Hardware Installation  
Installation  
4. If you are rack mounting the PresentationPRO-II chassis, follow the rack mount  
procedures as outlined in the “Rack-Mount Installation” section on page 22.  
5. Ethernet Connections (optional, for use with an external controller) — a  
completely “local” network connection is recommended, without IP connections to  
the outside world.  
a. Using an Ethernet cable, connect the PresentationPRO-II’s Ethernet port  
to a Hub or Switch.  
b. Connect the Ethernet Hub or Switch to the external controller’s Ethernet  
port.  
6. Source Connections  
a. As an important prerequisite, complete the “Input Connection Chart” on  
page 24 to streamline your source installation procedure.  
b. Using the information from the chart, connect the desired sources to the  
analog and digital input connectors as required.  
7. Output Connections  
a. One Analog Program Output is provided. Connect this output to the  
input of your analog projector, or analog Program monitor.  
b. One Digital Program Output is provided: Connect this output to the  
input of your digital projector, or digital Program monitor.  
8. Power Connection — connect an AC power cord to the AC Power Connector  
on the rear of the PresentationPRO-II chassis, and then to AC outlets. Connect  
AC Power cords (or AC adapters) to all peripheral equipment such as your  
monitor, projector and source devices. Please note:  
~
~
Connect each unit only to a properly rated supply circuit.  
Reliable grounding (earthing) of rack-mounted equipment should be  
maintained.  
9. Power On — turn on power to all units.  
10. Display Calibration — calibrate the Touch Screen display using the Display  
Settings Menu. From the Home Menu, press {DISPLAY} > {LCD CAL}, and  
following the prompts to calibrate the display.  
This completes the hardware installation procedure. Please continue with Chapter 4,  
“Menu Orientation.”  
26  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
QK==jÉåì=lêáÉåí~íáçå  
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê  
This chapter describes all PresentationPRO-II system menus, including how they are  
accessed, the functions that are available, and simple descriptions of each menu tree (in  
block diagram format).  
The following menus are discussed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Home Menu  
Input Menu  
Output Menu  
System Menu  
Effects Menu  
Status Menu  
Display Settings Menu  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
Key Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
Frame Grab Menu  
LOGO Input Setup Menu  
Remote Control Menu  
Button labels on the touch screen menus are shown in bold  
upper and lowercase letters between braces.  
Note  
S Press {BORDER} to …  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Home Menu  
eçãÉ=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates the Home Menu:  
PresentationPRO II  
INPUT  
OUTPUT  
DISPLAY  
SYSTEM  
EFFECTS  
FRAME  
GRAB  
REMOTE  
CONTROL  
STATUS  
Figure 4-1. Home Menu  
The Home Menu is the system’s top level menu, from which all other menus can be  
accessed. To access a menu, press the desired button on the touch screen. You can also  
return to the Home Menu by pressing the {Home} button from within an adjustment menu  
itself. The {Home} button is always the top left button on a screen.  
The following menus can be accessed from the Home Menu:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press {INPUT} to access the “Input Menu.”  
Press {OUTPUT} to access the “Output Menu.”  
Press {SYSTEM} to access the “System Menu.”  
Press {EFFECTS} to access the “Effects Menu.”  
Press {STATUS} to access the “Status Menu.”  
Press {DISPLAY} to access the “Display Settings Menu.”  
Press {FRAME GRAB} to access the “Frame Grab Menu.”  
Press {REMOTE CONTROL} to access the “Remote Control Menu.”  
däçÄ~ä=oìäÉë  
The following global rules apply to all menus:  
•
Parameters and values displayed between brackets (e.g., [525] ) cannot be  
changed.  
•
•
Press {HOME} to return to the Home Menu.  
Press {BACK} to return to the menu from which you accessed the current menu.  
28  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
fåéìí=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
Input Menu Tree  
Input Menu Description  
Input Menu Functions  
Input Pre and Sub Menus  
fåéìí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the Input Menu tree:  
Source Selection  
Input  
Acquisition  
Menu  
HOME MENU  
1
INPUT  
H
O
M
E
Input  
Configuration  
Menu  
C
F
G
INPUT MENU  
Aspect Ratio  
Menu  
A
R
S
A
V
E
SELECT  
FORMAT  
COLOR  
BALANCE  
FORCE  
ACQUIRE  
SIZING  
Color  
Balance  
Menu  
Sizing  
Menu  
Figure 4-2. Input Menu Tree  
All functions, sub menus and “pre-menus” are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
fåéìí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample Input Menu:  
INPUT MENU  
SRC_3  
H
Format 1024 x 768 @ 59.94  
O
N
A
V
M
E
Input Type  
[ RGB ]  
[ RGB ]  
[ 1:1 ]  
100.0  
100.0  
1.0  
Color Space  
C
F
Sampling Mode  
Contrast < % >  
Brightness < % >  
Gamma  
G
A
R
A
D
J
Input Sync Type  
Pulldown Compensation  
H/V  
S
A
V
E
On  
SELECT  
SIZING  
COLOR  
BALANCE  
FORCE  
ACQUIRE  
FORMAT  
Figure 4-3. Input Menu (sample)  
The Input Menu is used to adjust all parameters relating to inputs. Using the menu, you  
can set all of the configuration options for the selected source.  
There are several ways to access the menu:  
•
•
Press {INPUT} on the Home Menu.  
Press PIP or KEY in the Layer Functions Section, then press an input on the  
Source Selection Bus and ensure the button is blinking. If the Input  
Acquisition Menu appears (because the source has not yet been saved, or  
because video has not been detected), press {INPUT}.  
On the Input Menu, the currently selected input is shown in the menu’s upper right corner  
(e.g., SRC_3). The menu tracks the selected input, thus, if you switch inputs on the  
Source Selection Bus, the menu is immediately re-assigned to the new input.  
fåéìí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following Input Menu functions are provided:  
•
Format — this line performs two functions:  
~
Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE  
ACQUIRE function.  
~
Enables you to set the resolution of the incoming source if desired. Once  
the format is selected manually with the rotary knob, press {SELECT  
FORMAT} to “accept” the selection.  
30  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions“ section on page 129  
for additional details regarding resolutions.  
Selecting a format manually will automatically default the  
Input Type. In some cases, the Input Type cannot be  
changed due to the selected resolution.  
Note  
•
Input Type — sets the type of input connected to the PresentationPRO-II, such as  
RGB, SD, HD or Composite. Available choices change depending on the  
selected format. Selections include RGB, YP P , Composite/S-Video, SDI  
b
r
and HD SDI.  
•
•
Color Space — sets the input’s color space. Choices include SMPTE and RGB.  
Note that the system will automatically set the Color Space based on the selected  
Format and Input Type.  
Sampling Mode — sets the sampling mode for the selected input, either 1:1 or  
oversample.  
~
When 1:1 Sampling is selected, the system provides pixel-for-pixel  
sampling, and generally better image quality.  
~
When Oversample is selected, the system performs multiple samples  
for every pixel, with a resulting “softer” image.  
•
•
•
•
•
Contrast — sets the input’s contrast. The adjustment range is from 75% to  
125%.  
Brightness — sets the input’s brightness. The adjustment range is from 75% to  
125%.  
Gamma — sets the input gamma, enabling you to match the gamma of the  
source. The adjustment range is from 1.0 to 3.0, in 0.1 increments.  
Input Sync Type — sets the type of sync used by the selected source. Choices  
include H/V, CSync (composite sync), SOG (sync on green) and Auto.  
Pulldown Compensation — (On/Off) This function is applicable only for  
standard video (component, s-video, composite) inputs. The default mode is off.  
The feature should be turned on to process video derived from film material.  
•
Sync Slice <mv> — This function selects the sync comparator threshold for  
RGsB (RGB with Sync on Green) or YPbPr analog component video sources.  
The value ranges from 20mV to 280mV and is adjustable in steps of 10mV. The  
default value is 160mV.  
When PresentationPRO-II detects Macrovision® copy protection on incoming  
YPbPr NTSC/PAL video, the Sync Slice value is repositioned to 60mV to account  
for the reduced amplitude sync pulse.  
The default Sync Slice level has been optimized for virtually  
all sources that will be encountered and should rarely, if ever,  
require adjustment. However, the ability to adjust the Sync  
Slice level is provided to improve sync detection and  
synchronization in cases of extremely noisy RGsB or YPbPr  
video signals.  
Note  
•
Sharpness — sets the input’s sharpness. The adjustment range is from -10 (soft)  
to 10 (sharp).  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
•
•
•
Press {CFG} to display the Input Configuration Menu. Refer to the “Input  
Configuration Menu” section on page 34 for details.  
Press {AR} to display the Aspect Ratio Menu. Refer to the “Aspect Ratio Menu”  
section on page 38 for details.  
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
Every sub menu under the Input Menu includes a {SAVE}  
button. This enables you to save the input at any point in the  
adjustment process, regardless of your location within the  
menu tree. The “save” function uses the information selected  
on the Input Configuration Menu.  
Note  
•
Press {SELECT FORMAT} to “accept” a manually selected input format. In  
Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions“ section on page 129 for  
details on all available resolutions.  
•
•
•
Press {SIZING} to display the Sizing Menu. Refer to the “Sizing Menu” section  
on page 35 for details.  
Press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu. Refer to the  
“Color Balance Menu” section on page 37 for details.  
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the optimum image  
setup.  
The FORCE ACQUIRE command only works on the  
selected input — not on all inputs simultaneously.  
Note  
fåéìí=mêÉ=~åÇ=pìÄ=jÉåìë  
The following pre and sub menus can be accessed from the Input Menu:  
•
•
•
•
•
Input Acquisition Menu  
Input Configuration Menu  
Sizing Menu  
Color Balance Menu  
Aspect Ratio Menu  
32  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
fåéìí=^Åèìáëáíáçå=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a “pre” menu — the Input Acquisition Menu.  
INPUT ACQUISITION  
SRC_3  
H
O
M
E
Source acquired.  
Select INPUT to adjust source  
or SAVE to save configuration.  
S
A
V
E
INPUT  
Figure 4-4. Input Acquisition Menu: No File Saved (sample)  
There are two situations in which the Input Acquisition Menu can appear:  
1. After a factory reset has been performed, the Input Acquisition Menu  
automatically appears when you first select a source — but prior to pressing  
TRANS for the first time. As each source button is pressed, the system acquires  
the video and displays the menu. The following options are available:  
~
~
Press {SAVE} to save the source and display the Input Menu, or ...  
Press {INPUT} to display the Input Menu without saving the source.  
In this way, you can quickly acquire and save all nine inputs.  
2. After TRANS has been pressed for the first time, the Input Acquisition Menu will  
appear when you (a) select a source that has not been previously saved, and (b)  
press TRANS to transition that source to Program. Here also, the menu is  
displayed and you can save the source.  
Once the source has been saved, the Input Acquisition Menu will not be shown again,  
unless the system discovers that video is not present.  
If you select a source and there is a video mismatch, if video is not present or if the  
acquisition fails, one of the following messages will appear:  
File mismatch or no video  
Source acquisition failed.  
detected.  
Check cable connections  
Check cable connections  
for input _______ .  
for input _______ .  
Ensure video source is present.  
Ensure video source is present.  
Select FORCE ACQUIRE once video  
Select FORCE ACQUIRE once video  
is reconnected.  
is reconnected.  
Figure 4-5. Input Acquisition Menu: Mismatch or No Video (sample)  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
In this situation, the following actions are recommended:  
•
•
Check all cable connections for the selected input.  
With a connection established, press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to perform the optimum  
image setup and automatically display the Input Menu, or ...  
•
Press {INPUT} to display the Input Menu without performing a FORCE  
ACQUIRE.  
fåéìí=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå=jÉåì  
From the Input Menu, press {CFG} to display the Input Configuration Menu, a sample of  
which is shown below:  
INPUT CONFIGURATION  
File Number  
SRC_3  
[ 3 ]  
H
O
M
E
N
A
V
File Name  
[ IFILE_003 ]  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
SAVE  
DELETE  
Figure 4-6. Input Configuration Menu (sample)  
Each input has an associated input file that stores all input parameters and settings. Each  
time an input is selected in the Source Selection Bus, its associated file is recalled.  
The Input Configuration Menu enables you to save the input’s associated file — which  
guarantees that the exact parameters you set are those that are used on air.  
The following functions are provided:  
•
File Number — sets the file number into which data is stored. In the current  
version, the file number automatically defaults to the input number and cannot be  
changed.  
•
File Name — sets the alphanumeric file name. In the current version, the file  
name automatically defaults to the input name and cannot be changed.  
•
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
Press {DELETE} to delete the selected input file.  
34  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
páòáåÖ=jÉåì  
From the Input Menu, press {SIZING} to display one of two Sizing Menus. These menus  
are context sensitive — they change depending on the Sampling Mode selected on the  
Input Menu.  
•
•
If 1:1 Sampling is selected, the 1:1 Sizing Menu appears.  
If Oversample is selected, the Oversample Sizing Menu appears.  
Each menu and function is described below.  
NWN=páòáåÖ=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample 1:1 Sizing Menu.  
1:1 SIZING  
SRC_3  
0
H
Clock Phase  
O
N
A
V
M
E
H Total  
[ 858 ]  
720  
123  
[ 0 ]  
486  
36  
H Active  
B
A
C
H Position  
K
V Total  
V Active  
V Position  
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 4-7. 1:1 Sizing Menu (sample)  
•
Clock Phase — sets the system’s A/D converter, allowing you to select where  
pixels are sampled (ideally, on the pixel’s peak). The adjustment range is -16 to  
15. For optimum visual results when adjusting high-resolution computer sources,  
project a burst test pattern and adjust the sampling for the minimum noise. Refer  
to the “Test Pattern Menu” section on page 42 for information.  
•
H Total — sets the total pixel count per line.  
This field is not adjustable for digital sources (including both  
the DVI and BNC input connectors), or for NTSC and PAL  
sources, regardless of connection type.  
Note  
•
•
•
•
•
•
H Active — sets the width of the active area.  
H Position — sets the start of the active area’s horizontal offset from H sync.  
V Total — fixed value which cannot be adjusted.  
V Active — sets the number of vertical lines in the image.  
V Position — sets the start of the active area’s vertical offset from V sync.  
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
lîÉêë~ãéäÉ=páòáåÖ=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample Oversample Sizing Menu.  
OVERSAMPLE SIZING  
Right Edge  
SRC_3  
4062  
606  
H
O
M
E
N
A
V
Left Edge  
Top Edge  
36  
B
A
C
K
Bottom Edge  
519  
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 4-8. Oversample Sizing Menu (sample)  
With Oversample enabled, four timing parameters are provided that enable you to adjust  
the image to properly fit the image’s raster box.  
•
Select and adjust Right Edge, Left Edge, Top Edge or Bottom Edge as  
required, to fit the image precisely in its raster box.  
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
36  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
`çäçê=_~ä~åÅÉ=jÉåì  
From the Input Menu, press {COLOR BALANCE} to display the Color Balance Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
COLOR BALANCE  
Saturation < % >  
Hue  
SRC_3  
100  
0
H
O
M
E
N
A
V
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
RESET  
ALL  
Figure 4-9. Color Balance Menu (sample)  
The Color Balance Menu changes depending on the selected Input Type.  
•
When RGB sources are selected, the menu provides individual contrast and  
brightness adjustments for R, G and B. Adjustment range is -25% to +25%.  
~
~
~
Adjust Red Contrast and Brightness as required.  
Adjust Green Contrast and Brightness as required.  
Adjust Blue Contrast and Brightness as required.  
•
When Composite, S-Video or YPbPr is selected:  
~
~
Adjust Saturation as required. The adjustment range is 75% to 125%.  
Adjust Hue as required. The range (in degrees) is -90.0 to 90.0.  
When the Input Type is YPbPr, the Hue field reads “N/A”  
because Hue does not apply to this type of source.  
Note  
•
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
Press {RESET ALL} to return all parameters to their default values.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Menu  
^ëéÉÅí=o~íáç=jÉåì  
From the Input Menu, press {AR} to display the Aspect Ratio Menu, a sample of which is  
shown below.  
ASPECT RATIO  
Mode  
SRC_3  
Custom  
1.279  
H
O
M
E
N
A
V
Ratio  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 4-10. Aspect Ratio Menu (sample)  
The Aspect Ratio Menu enables you to change the image’s aspect ratio to pre-defined  
configurations, or enter a “custom” configuration if desired.  
•
•
Mode — select 16:9, 5:4, 4:3, 3:2, 1:1 or Custom aspect ratios.  
Ratio — when Custom is selected, the Ratio line appears. Enter a custom  
aspect ratio as desired. The field is hidden when pre-defined ratios are selected.  
•
Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file.  
38  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
Output Menu  
lìíéìí=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
Output Menu Tree  
Output Menu Description  
Output Menu Functions  
Output Sub Menus  
lìíéìí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the Output Menu tree:  
HOME MENU  
OUTPUT  
H
O
M
E
OUTPUT MENU  
SELECT  
FORMAT  
TEST  
PATTERN  
SETTINGS  
Test  
Pattern  
Menu  
Settings  
Menu  
Figure 4-11. Output Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
Output Menu  
lìíéìí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample Output Menu:  
OUTPUT MENU  
H
Format  
1024x768 @ 59.94  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Color Space  
[ RGB ]  
Press SELECT FORMAT to select  
the output resolution.  
DVI EDID format can be adjusted  
to match the output format in  
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
The HOME > SYSTEM > EDID menu.  
SELECT  
FORMAT  
TEST  
PATTERN  
SETTINGS  
Figure 4-12. Output Menu (sample)  
The Output Menu enables you to configure PresentationPRO-II’s outputs, including the  
ability to show test patterns. To access the menu:  
•
Press {OUTPUT} on the Home Menu.  
On the menu, note that brief “help” messages are displayed to assist you with format  
selection and EDID programming.  
lìíéìí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following Output Menu functions are provided:  
•
Format — sets the resolution and frame rate at which you want to drive your  
projector. To minimize synchronization problems, select a frame rate that is  
consistent with your input sources.  
S Example: If you are using 59.94 NTSC video inputs, run the output at the  
same rate in order to reduce jutter artifacts.  
After selecting a format with the rotary knob, press {SELECT FORMAT} to  
“accept” the selection. In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output  
Resolutions“ section for details on all available resolutions.  
•
•
•
Color Space — displays the output color space, which is fixed at RGB.  
Press {SAVE} to save all output settings in the output file.  
Press {SELECT FORMAT} to “accept” an output format. In Appendix A, see the  
“Input and Output Resolutions“ section for details on available resolutions.  
•
•
Press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu. Refer to the “Settings Menu”  
section on page 41 for details.  
Press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu. Refer to the “Test  
Pattern Menu” section on page 42 for details.  
40  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4. Menu Orientation  
Output Menu  
lìíéìí=pìÄ=jÉåìë  
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Output Menu:  
•
•
Settings Menu  
Test Pattern Menu  
pÉííáåÖë=jÉåì  
From the Output Menu, press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu, a sample of  
which is shown below.  
SETTINGS  
H
Sync Out  
SOG  
-H-V  
Off  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Gamma  
1.0  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
Figure 4-13. Settings Menu (sample)  
The Settings Menu enables you to set sync parameters for the monitor and projector  
connected to the system.  
•
Sync Out — sets the desired sync value. Select +H+V, -H-V, +H-V, -H+V or  
CSync.  
•
•
SOG — turns the “sync on green” signal Off or On.  
Gamma — sets the output gamma to match that of your projector. The default  
value is 1.0.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4. Menu Orientation  
Output Menu  
qÉëí=m~ííÉêå=jÉåì  
From the Output Menu, press {TEST PATTERN} to display the Test Pattern Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
TEST PATTERN  
H
Type  
Burst  
On  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Raster Box  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
Figure 4-14. Test Pattern Menu (sample)  
The Test Pattern Menu enables you to display a variety of test patterns, for system and  
projector alignment.  
•
Type — sets the test pattern. Choose between:  
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
Off  
H Ramp, V Ramp  
100% Color Bars, 75% Color Bars  
16x16 Grid, 32x32 Grid  
Burst  
50% Gray, Gray Steps 1, Gray Steps 2  
White, Black, Red, Green, Blue  
When the test pattern is enabled, it assumes the highest  
Note  
visual priority and covers all effects beneath. When disabled,  
the effects once again re-appear.  
•
Raster Box — displays a raster box defined by the exact outer edges of the  
selected output resolution. For example, if the output is set to 1024 x 768, the  
raster box will encapsulate that exact format. Please note:  
~
The Burst test pattern is the only pattern that is smaller than the selected  
output resolution. When the Raster Box is enabled, the Burst pattern  
will appear within its boundaries.  
~
The Raster Box can be enabled when the test pattern is Off.  
42  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
póëíÉã=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
System Menu Tree  
System Menu Description  
System Menu Functions  
System Sub Menus  
póëíÉã=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the System Menu tree:  
HOME MENU  
SYSTEM  
H
O
M
E
R
E
S
E
T
Reset Menu  
SW  
SYSTEM MENU  
Software  
Version Menu  
V
E
R
D
I
A
G
Diagnostics  
Menu  
Rotary Encoder Menu  
Key Detect Menu  
TECH  
SUPPORT  
CONSOLE  
EDID  
Technical  
Support Menu  
Console  
Port Setup  
Menu  
EDID DVI  
Input Format  
Menu  
Figure 4-15. System Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
póëíÉã=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample System Menu:  
SYSTEM MENU  
H
O
M
E
R
E
S
E
T
SW  
V
E
R
D
I
A
G
TECH  
SUPPORT  
CONSOLE  
EDID  
SAVE  
Figure 4-16. System Menu (sample)  
The System Menu enables you to configure PresentationPRO-II using various functions  
and sub menus. To access the menu:  
•
Press {SYSTEM} on the Home Menu.  
póëíÉã=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following System Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu. Refer to the “Reset Menu” section on  
page 48 for details.  
Press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu. Refer to the “Software  
Version Menu” section on page 49 for details.  
Press {DIAG} to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu. Refer to the  
“Diagnostics Setup Menu” section on page 45 for details.  
Press {CONSOLE} to display the Console Port Setup Menu. Refer to the  
“Console Port Setup Menu” section on page 50 for details.  
Press {EDID} to display the EDID DVI Input Format Menu. Refer to the “EDID  
DVI Input Format Menu” section on page 51 for details.  
Press {TECH SUPPORT} to display the Technical Support Menu. Refer to the  
“Technical Support Menu” section on page 52 for details.  
Press {SAVE} to save all settings in the system file.  
44  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
póëíÉã=pìÄ=jÉåìë  
The following sub menus can be accessed from the System Menu:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Diagnostics Setup Menu  
Reset Menu  
Software Version Menu  
Console Port Setup Menu  
EDID DVI Input Format Menu  
Technical Support Menu  
aá~ÖåçëíáÅë=pÉíìé=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {DIAG} to display the Diagnostics Setup Menu, a sample  
of which is shown below.  
DIAGNOSTICS SETUP  
H
Reset Rotary Encoders  
NVRAM Battery  
Yes  
O
M
E
N
A
V
[ OK ]  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
START  
LED TEST  
ROTARY  
ENCODER  
KEY  
DETECT  
Figure 4-17. Diagnostics Setup Menu (sample)  
The Diagnostics Setup Menu enables you to perform a variety of diagnostic tests on the  
PresentationPRO-II. The following functions are provided:  
•
Reset Rotary Encoders — (Yes/No) determines whether or not you wish to reset  
the rotary encoder values when you exit the Rotary Encoder Menu.  
•
•
NVRAM Battery — displays the condition of the system’s NVRAM battery.  
Press {START LED TEST} to begin testing all LEDs. The test takes several  
minutes to complete. Press {EXIT} at the conclusion of the test.  
•
•
Press {ROTARY ENCODER} to display the Rotary Encoder Menu. Refer to the  
“Rotary Encoder Menu” section on page 46 for details.  
Press {KEY DETECT} to display the Key Detect Menu. Refer to the “Key Detect  
Menu” section on page 47 for details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
oçí~êó=båÅçÇÉê=jÉåì  
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {ROTARY ENCODER} to display the Rotary  
Encoder Menu, a sample of which is shown below.  
ROTARY ENCODER DIAGNOSTICS  
E
Rotary #  
RelCnt  
AbsCnt  
X
I
T
1
2
0
0
0
0
Figure 4-18. Rotary Encoder Menu (sample)  
The Rotary Encoder Menu enables you to test the functionality of each rotary encoder,  
displaying both relative and absolute counts for each.  
•
Press {EXIT} to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu.  
46  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
hÉó=aÉíÉÅí=jÉåì  
From the Diagnostics Setup Menu, press {KEY DETECT} to display the Key Detect  
Menu, a sample of which is shown below.  
KEY DETECTION DIAGNOSTICS  
E
Key Label:  
SOURCE 1  
Released  
0x81  
X
I
T
Key Status:  
Key Scan Code:  
row=1 col=0  
Please select any key.  
Figure 4-19. Key Detect Menu (sample)  
The Key Detect Menu shows you the key that is pressed, its status (pressed or released)  
its scan code and its location in the button matrix.  
•
Press {EXIT} to return to the Diagnostics Setup Menu.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
oÉëÉí=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu:  
SYSTEM RESET  
H
Reset Type  
SOFT  
O
M
E
N
A
V
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
RESET  
Figure 4-20. Reset Menu  
The Reset Menu enables you to perform various system reset functions. The following  
functions are provided:  
•
•
Reset Type — selects the specific type of reset that you wish to perform. Choose  
between SOFT or FACTORY. Note that selecting SOFT will not delete any user  
defined configurations, while FACTORY deletes all user configurations.  
Press {RESET} to perform the selected reset operation. When the confirmation  
screen appears:  
~
Press {YES} to start the reset procedure. An “In Progress” message will  
be displayed.  
~
Press {NO} to cancel the procedure.  
A factory reset will erase any “frame grab” images that have  
been stored in flash memory.  
Note  
48  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
pçÑíï~êÉ=sÉêëáçå=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {SW VER} to display the Software Version Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
SOFTWARE VERSION  
H
PrePRO II  
1.00  
O
M
E
B
A
C
K
Figure 4-21. Software Version Menu (sample)  
The Software Version Menu enables you to display and verify the system’s software  
version. The following functions are provided:  
•
PresentationPRO-II — displays the system’s current software version.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
`çåëçäÉ=mçêí=pÉíìé=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {CONSOLE} to display the Console Port Setup Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
CONSOLE PORT SETUP  
H
Baud Rate  
115200  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Data Bits  
Parity  
8
NONE  
1
B
A
C
K
Stop Bits  
A
D
J
Figure 4-22. Console Port Setup Menu (sample)  
The Console Port Setup Menu enables you to set the PresentationPRO-II’s RS-232  
communications parameters for serial port 1.  
•
Baud Rate — sets the desired baud rate (9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 38400,  
57600, 115200).  
•
•
•
Data Bits — sets the desired number of data bits (7 or 8).  
Parity — sets the desired parity (None, Even, or Odd).  
Stop Bits — sets the desired number of stop bits (1 or 2).  
50  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
bafa=asf=fåéìí=cçêã~í=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {EDID} to display the EDID DVI Input Format Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
EDID DVI Input Format  
H
Format  
1280 x 1024 @ 60  
O
M
E
Current:  
[ 1280 x 1024 @ 60 ]  
B
A
C
K
To change EDID for BG/DSK,  
select the desired format  
and select Program EDID.  
A
D
J
PROGRAM  
EDID  
Figure 4-23. EDID DVI Input Format Menu (sample)  
The EDID DVI Input Format Menu enables you to update the system’s preferred EDID  
resolution for the BG/DSK input.  
This menu is designed for advanced users only. Do not  
program the EDID unless it is necessary.  
Note  
Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) is a VESA standard data format that contains  
information about a display device and its resolution capabilities, both preferred and  
allowed. The PresentationPRO-II EDID file is stored in non-volatile memory. This file is  
read by an external computer’s DVI graphic card when the DVI output is connected to the  
PresentationPRO-II’s BG/DSK input connector during boot-up.  
•
Format — select the preferred DVI video format with which you want to program  
the PresentationPRO-II’s EDID non-volatile memory  
•
•
Current — displays the current EDID video format that resides in memory.  
Press {PROGRAM EDID} to program EDID with the new selected format. A  
warning message will be shown.  
Once EDID programming is complete on PresentationPRO-II,  
you will be prompted to power down the external computer,  
power it back on again, and then ensure that the computer’s  
format is set to match.  
Note  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
System Menu  
qÉÅÜåáÅ~ä=pìééçêí=jÉåì  
From the System Menu, press {TECH SUPPORT} to display the Technical Support  
Menu:  
TECHNICAL SUPPORT  
H
PrePRO II  
Phone:  
1.00  
O
M
E
866-374-7878  
B
A
C
K
Figure 4-24. Technical Support Menu (sample)  
The Technical Support Menu lists the current version of PresentationPRO-II software,  
and displays the company’s Technical Support phone number.  
52  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
Effects Menu  
bÑÑÉÅíë=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample Effects Menu:  
EFFECTS MENU  
H
O
M
E
Transition Rate  
Transition Type  
Transition Edge  
1.0  
Mix  
16  
N
A
V
A
D
J
Figure 4-25. Effects Menu (sample)  
The Effects Menu allows you to modify and manage effects, including the ability to set the  
transition type, rate and wipe pattern. The following functions are provided:  
•
Transition Rate — sets the transition rate that is used when the TRANS button is  
pressed (and a Mix or Wipe pattern is selected). The transition value is in 0.1  
second increments.  
•
•
Transition Type — sets the type of transition that occurs when the TRANS button  
is pressed — either a Mix, or one of several Wipe patterns.  
Transition Edge — sets the edge width (in pixels) for the selected wipe pattern.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
Status Menu  
pí~íìë=jÉåì  
The Status Menu provides basic software version information, as shown in the sample  
menu below:  
SYSTEM STATUS  
H
PrePRO II  
1.00  
O
M
E
Figure 4-26. Status Menu (sample)  
The following status information is provided:  
PresentationPRO-II — displays the system’s current software version.  
•
54  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Menu Orientation  
Display Settings Menu  
aáëéä~ó=pÉííáåÖë=jÉåì  
The Display Settings Menu enables you to adjust the displays brightness and contrast, as  
well as calibrate the display. A sample menu is shown below:  
DISPLAY SETTINGS  
B
R
I
H
O
M
E
Brightness  
Contrast  
85  
97  
T
E
C
O
N
T
R
A
S
T
LIGHT  
ADJUST  
RESET  
LCD CAL  
Figure 4-27. Display Settings Menu (sample)  
The following display adjustments are provided:  
•
•
•
•
Brightness — use the top rotary knob to adjust the display’s brightness.  
Contrast — use the middle rotary knob to adjust the display’s contrast.  
Press {RESET} to return the display’s settings to factory default values.  
Press {LIGHT ADJUST} to adjust the backlight of the front panel buttons. The  
Keypad Backlight Menu appears. Refer to the “Keypad Backlight Menu”  
section on page 56 for details.  
•
Press {LCD CAL} to calibrate the touch screen display to your finger, or to a  
stylus. Once pressed, you will be prompted to touch the center of a target three  
times. At the conclusion of the procedure, the display is calibrated and the system  
returns to the Home Menu.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4. Menu Orientation  
Display Settings Menu  
hÉóé~Ç=_~ÅâäáÖÜí=jÉåì  
From the Display Settings Menu, press {LIGHT ADJUST} to display the Keypad  
Backlight Menu, which enables you to adjust the backlight of all “dim” front panel buttons.  
A sample menu is shown below:  
KEYPAD BACKLIGHT  
H
O
M
E
A
D
J
Keypad Backlight  
10  
B
A
C
K
Figure 4-28. Keypad Backlight Menu (sample)  
The following adjustments are provided:  
•
Keypad Backlight — use the top rotary knob to adjust the backlight of all “dim”  
(un-selected) front panel buttons. This adjustment will assist overall button  
visibility in dark control room or stage settings.  
56  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
PIP Adjustment Menu Tree  
PIP Adjustment Menu Description  
PIP Adjustment Menu Functions  
PIP Adjustment Sub Menus  
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the PIP Adjustment Menu tree:  
PIP  
H
O
M
E
Home Menu  
S
R
C
Input Source  
Adjustment Menu  
PIP  
ADJUSTMENT  
MENU  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
B
O
R
D
E
R
Crop Menu  
Shadow Menu  
Border Menu  
C
R
O
P
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Image Effects Menu  
Crop Menu  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
Shadow Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Figure 4-29. PIP Adjustment Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample PIP Adjustment Menu:  
PIP ADJUSTMENT  
H
H Size < 37.3% >  
V Size < 58.9% >  
H Position  
674  
O
M
E
N
A
V
452  
-34  
70  
S
R
C
V Position  
B
O
R
D
E
R
A
D
J
C
R
O
P
TRACK SIZE  
3
Figure 4-30. PIP Adjustment Menu (sample)  
The PIP Adjustment Menu provides tools that enable you to adjust the active PIP. To  
access the menu:  
•
Press the PIP button in the Layer Function Section.  
The menu will immediately appear on the Touch Screen display.  
If you select a source button and both the PIP and KEY  
Note  
buttons are off, the system displays a brief prompt: “PIP or  
KEY must be selected.”  
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following PIP Adjustment Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
•
•
H Size — adjusts the PIP’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates the PIP’s size  
as a percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is the  
PIP’s width in pixels.  
V Size — adjusts the PIP’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates the PIP’s size as  
a percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is the PIP’s  
height in pixels.  
H Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative to the horizontal center of the  
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus, the value -34 is  
34 pixels to the left of center.  
V Position — indicates the PIP’s position, relative to the vertical center of the  
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the PIP. Thus, the value 70 is  
70 pixels above center.  
58  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
•
•
•
•
Press {SRC} to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Input  
Source Adjustment Menu” section on page 71 for details.  
Press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”  
section on page 60 for details.  
Press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu. Refer to the “Crop Menu” section on  
page 61 for details.  
Enable {TRACK SIZE} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the  
PIP’s current aspect ratio, its size will adjust proportionally when you adjust either  
H or V size.  
When {TRACK SIZE} is disabled, you can do the following:  
~
Adjust H SIZE to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size  
alone. In this way, you can stretch the PIP horizontally.  
~
Adjust V SIZE to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size  
as is. In this way, you can stretch the PIP vertically.  
To return the PIP to its default size and aspect ratio, press the  
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other  
parameters (such as Shadow or Border) will be affected.  
Note  
mfm=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=pìÄ=jÉåìë  
The following sub menus can be accessed via the PIP Adjustment Menu:  
•
•
•
•
•
Border Menu  
Crop Menu  
Shadow Menu  
Image Effects Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
_çêÇÉê=jÉåì  
From the PIP Adjustment Menu, the Input Source Adjustment Menu, the Shadow  
Menu or the Image Effects Menu, press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu, a  
sample of which is shown below.  
BORDER  
H
Mode  
On  
5
O
M
E
N
A
V
Style  
Color: Red  
609  
P
I
P
Green  
600  
Blue  
531  
S
H
A
D
O
W
Size Specified In  
Size < % of PIP >  
% of PIP  
10.2  
A
D
J
E
F
X
Figure 4-31. Border Menu (sample)  
The Border Menu enables you to add a border to a PIP, and adjust its shape, style and  
color as desired. The following functions are provided:  
•
•
Mode — enables or disables the PIP’s border.  
Style — select one of many border styles, including single color and dual color  
with various combinations of soft edge.  
•
•
•
Color — enables you to individually adjust the border’s Red, Green and Blue  
attributes as desired.  
Size Specified In — select the method by which you want to specify the border  
size, either as a percentage of the PIP size or in pixels.  
Size — adjust’s the border size, using the method selected on the “Size  
Specified In” line. Note that if “% of PIP” is selected and you switch to “Pixels,”  
the system auto converts one display method to the other.  
•
•
•
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP  
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 58 for details.  
Press {SHADOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”  
section on page 62 for details.  
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects  
Menu” section on page 63 for details.  
To remove any border effects from the PIP, press the RESET  
button in the Layer Functions Section. No other parameters  
(such as Size or Crop) will be affected.  
Note  
60  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
`êçé=jÉåì  
From the PIP Adjustment Menu, the Input Source Adjustment Menu, the Key Menu, or  
the Key Adjustment Menu, press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu.  
CROP ADJUSTMENT  
H
H Size < 46.9% >  
V Size < 46.9% >  
Crop Type  
480  
360  
O
M
E
N
A
V
ALL-SIDES  
4:3  
S
R
C
Aspect Ratio Mode  
Ratio  
1.333  
B
O
R
D
E
R
A
D
J
P
I
P
TRACK SIZE  
3
Figure 4-32. Crop Menu (sample)  
The Crop Menu lets you crop the sides of a PIP or a Key — individually or proportionally,  
without affecting the size of the source image. The following functions are provided:  
•
•
H Size — adjusts the PIP or Key’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates size as  
a percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric value is the width  
in pixels. If {TRACK SIZE} is enabled, H and V crop proportionally.  
V Size — adjusts the PIP or Key’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates size as a  
percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value is the height in  
pixels. If {TRACK SIZE} is enabled, H and V crop proportionally.  
•
•
•
Crop Type — selects the current type of crop function, either ALL-SIDES, TOP-  
LEFT, or BOTTOM-RIGHT.  
Aspect Ratio Mode — enables you to select one of several standard aspect  
ratios: 16:9, 5:4, 4:3, 3:2 and 1:1.  
Ratio — displays the corresponding ratio based on the selected Aspect Ratio  
Mode: 1.777, 1.25, 1.333, 1.500, 1.000, respectively.  
If you select Ratio and make adjustments away from the  
default setting, the Aspect Ratio Mode automatically  
changes to Custom.  
Note  
•
•
•
Enable the {TRACK SIZE} function to proportionally crop H Size and V Size.  
Disable the function for individual parameter adjustments.  
Press {SRC} to display the Input Source Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Input  
Source Adjustment Menu” section on page 71 for details.  
Press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”  
section on page 60 for details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
•
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP  
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 58 for details.  
To remove any crop effects from the PIP or Key, press the  
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other  
Note  
parameters will be affected.  
pÜ~Ççï=jÉåì  
From the Border Menu or the Image Effects Menu, press {SHADOW} to display the  
Shadow Menu, a sample of which is shown below.  
SHADOW  
H
Mode  
On  
106  
106  
28  
O
M
E
N
A
V
H Size < % >  
V Size < % >  
P
I
P
H Pos < pixel >  
V Pos < pixel >  
Transparency  
11  
B
O
R
D
E
R
100  
A
D
J
E
F
X
TRACK SIZE  
3
Figure 4-33. Shadow Menu (sample)  
The Shadow Menu enables you place a shadow behind a PIP, and adjust its size, position  
and transparency. The following functions are provided:  
•
•
Mode — enables or disables the PIP’s shadow.  
H Size < % > — adjusts the shadow’s horizontal size as a percentage of the PIP’s  
size. If {TRACK SIZE} is enabled, H and V size adjust proportionally.  
•
•
•
•
•
•
V Size < % > — adjusts the shadow’s vertical size as a percentage of the PIP’s  
size. If {TRACK SIZE} is enabled, H and V size adjust proportionally.  
H Pos < pixel > — adjusts the shadow’s horizontal position in pixels, as an offset  
from the PIP’s horizontal position.  
V Pos < pixel > — adjusts the shadow’s vertical position in pixels, as an offset  
from the PIP’s vertical position.  
Transparency — adjusts the shadow’s transparency, from 0 (full transparency) to  
1024 (opaque).  
Enable the {TRACK SIZE} function to adjust the shadow’s H Size and V Size  
proportionally.  
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP  
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 58 for details.  
62  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                       
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
•
•
Press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”  
section on page 60 for details.  
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects  
Menu” section on page 63 for details.  
To remove any shadow effects from the PIP or Key, press the  
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other  
parameters will be affected.  
Note  
fã~ÖÉ=bÑÑÉÅíë=jÉåì  
From the Border Menu and Matte Menu, press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu:  
IMAGE EFFECTS  
H
Monochrome Mode  
Off  
100  
100  
100  
Off  
0
O
M
E
N
A
V
Red  
Green  
P
I
P
Blue  
Invert  
B
O
R
D
E
R
Hue  
- - - - - - STROBE - - - - - -  
Mode  
A
D
J
Off  
2
S
H
A
D
O
W
Interval (frames)  
RESET  
RGB  
Figure 4-34. Image Effects Menu (sample)  
The Image Effects Menu enables you to creatively manipulate the selected PIP or Key:  
•
Monochrome Mode — turns chroma on or off. When the mode is enabled, the  
image is completely monochrome.  
•
•
•
Red — adjusts the image’s red saturation. Adjustment range is 0 to 100.  
Green — adjusts the image’s green saturation. Adjustment range is 0 to 100.  
Blue — adjusts the image’s blue saturation. Adjustment range is 0 to 100.  
The Red, Green and Blue adjustments function whether or  
not Monochrome Mode is enabled.  
Note  
Tip  
For a sepia tone effect, turn Monochrome Mode on, and set  
Red to 100, Green to 65 and Blue to 10.  
•
Invert — enables you to invert all image colors.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4. Menu Orientation  
PIP Adjustment Menu  
•
•
Hue — adjusts the image’s hue, by rotating color vectors throughout the 360  
degree color spectrum.  
Mode — In the “Strobe” section, enables or disables the strobe mode which when  
enabled, acts as a programmable freeze.  
•
•
•
Interval (frames) — In the “Strobe” section, sets the freeze interval.  
Press {RESET RGB} to reset all image colors to their default values.  
Press {PIP} to return to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP  
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 58 for details.  
•
•
Press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border Menu”  
section on page 60 for details.  
Press {SHADOW} to display the Shadow Menu. Refer to the “Shadow Menu”  
section on page 62 for details.  
To remove any image effects from the PIP or Key, press the  
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other  
parameters will be affected.  
Note  
64  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
hÉó=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
Key Menu Tree  
Key Menu Description  
Key Menu Functions  
Key Sub Menus  
hÉó=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the Key Menu tree:  
KEY  
H
O
Home Menu  
M
E
C
R
Crop Menu  
O
P
KEY  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
MENU  
Border Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
SIZE &  
POS  
MATTE  
Key Adjustment  
Menu  
Matte Menu  
Key Menu  
Key Menu  
Matte Menu  
Crop Menu  
Image Effects Menu  
Key Adjustment Menu  
Figure 4-35. Key Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
hÉó=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample Key Menu:  
KEY  
H
Key Type  
[ Luma ]  
Off  
O
N
A
V
M
E
Invert Mode  
Clip  
0
Gain  
1.00  
624  
Opacity  
Fill Source  
Self  
A
D
J
C
R
O
P
SIZE &  
POS  
MATTE  
Figure 4-36. Key Menu (sample)  
The Key Menu provides tools to adjust the active key. To access the menu:  
Press the KEY button in the Layer Function Section.  
The menu will immediately appear on the Touch Screen display.  
•
If you select a source button and both the PIP and KEY  
Note  
buttons are off, the system displays a brief prompt: “PIP or  
KEY must be selected.”  
hÉó=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following Key Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
•
Key Type — displays the type of key, currently fixed as a “Luma” key.  
Invert Mode — enables you to invert the key signal.  
Clip — adjusts the threshold of the video that electronically “cuts” into the  
background image. A hole will be cut into the background anywhere that  
foreground luminance is greater than the clip level. The hole is then filled with the  
Fill Source. Adjustment range is 0 to 1023.  
•
•
Gain — adjusts the sensitivity of the keyer, enabling you to change the sharpness  
of the keyed image. Gain only affects the key hole, as set by the clip. Adjustment  
range is 0 to 1023.99.  
Opacity — enables you to adjust the opacity of the keyed image, from fully  
opaque to fully transparent. Adjustment range is 0 to 1024.  
66  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
•
Fill Source — determines the video that fills the key hole:  
~
Self — fills the hole with the key source video itself, for example, the  
video from a character generator.  
~
Matte — fills the hole with a matte color, which can then be adjusted with  
the Matte Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu“ section on page 68 for  
details.  
•
•
•
Press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu. Refer to the “Crop Menu” section on  
page 61 for details.  
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. See the “Matte Menu” section on  
page 68 for details.  
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key  
Adjustment Menu” section on page 69 for details.  
To return the Key to its default clip values, press the RESET  
button in the Layer Functions Section. No other parameters  
will be affected.  
Note  
hÉó=pìÄ=jÉåìë  
The following sub menus can be accessed from the Key Adjustment Menu:  
•
•
•
Crop Menu  
Matte Menu  
Key Adjustment Menu  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
j~ííÉ=jÉåì  
From the Key Menu or the Key Adjustment Menu, press {MATTE} to display the Matte  
Menu, a sample of which is shown below.  
MATTE  
H
Red  
528  
204  
260  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Green  
Blue  
K
E
Y
A
D
J
E
F
X
SIZE &  
POS  
TRACK RGB  
Figure 4-37. Matte Menu (sample)  
The Matte Menu enables you to adjust the fill color of a matte key. The following functions  
are provided:  
•
•
•
•
Red — adjust the red component of the matte fill as required, from 0 to 1024.  
Green — adjust the green component of the matte fill as required, from 0 to 1024.  
Blue — adjust the blue component of the matte fill, from 0 to 1024.  
Press {KEY} to return to the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu Description”  
section on page 66 for details.  
•
•
•
Press {EFX} to display the Image Effects Menu. Refer to the “Image Effects  
Menu” section on page 63 for details.  
Enable the {TRACK RGB} function to adjust Red, Green and Blue proportionally.  
Disable the function to adjust colors individually.  
Press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “Key  
Adjustment Menu” section on page 69 for details.  
To return all matte values to 512, press the RESET button in  
the Layer Functions Section. No other parameters will be  
affected.  
Note  
68  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
hÉó=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì  
From the Key Menu and the Matte Menu, press {SIZE & POS} to display the Key  
Adjustment Menu, a sample of which is shown below.  
KEY ADJUSTMENT  
H
H Size < 33.5% >  
V Size < 58.3% >  
H Position  
606  
448  
-160  
64  
O
M
E
N
A
V
K
E
Y
V Position  
M
A
T
T
E
A
D
J
C
R
O
P
TRACK SIZE  
3
Figure 4-38. Key Adjustment Menu (sample)  
The Key Adjustment Menu is virtually identical to the PIP Adjustment Menu — except  
that it pertains to Keys rather than PIPs. The following functions are provided:  
•
•
•
•
H Size — adjusts the Key’s horizontal size in pixels. The “%” value indicates the  
key’s size as a percentage of the screen’s horizontal resolution. The numeric  
value is the Key’s width in pixels.  
V Size — adjusts the Key’s vertical size in pixels. The “%” value indicates the  
Key’s size as a percentage of the screen’s vertical resolution. The numeric value  
is the Key’s height in pixels.  
H Position — indicates the Key’s position, relative to the horizontal center of the  
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the Key. Thus, the value -160  
is 160 pixels to the left of center.  
V Position — indicates the Key’s position, relative to the vertical center of the  
screen (00), as measured from the exact center of the Key. Thus, the value 64 is  
64 pixels above center.  
•
•
•
•
Press {KEY} to return to the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu Description”  
section on page 66 for details.  
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. See the “Matte Menu” section on  
page 68 for details.  
Press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu. Refer to the “Crop Menu” section on  
page 61 for details.  
Enable {TRACK SIZE} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the  
Key’s current aspect ratio, its size will adjust proportionally when you adjust either  
H or V size.  
When {TRACK SIZE} is disabled, you can do the following:  
~
Adjust H SIZE to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size  
alone. In this way, you can stretch the Key horizontally.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
4. Menu Orientation  
Key Menu  
~
Adjust V SIZE to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size  
as is. In this way, you can stretch the Key vertically.  
To return the Key to its default size and aspect ratio, press the  
RESET button in the Layer Functions Section. No other  
parameters will be affected.  
Note  
70  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
fåéìí=pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
Input Source Adjustment Menu Tree  
Input Source Adjustment Menu Description  
Input Source Adjustment Menu Functions  
fåéìí=pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the Input Source Adjustment Menu tree:  
PIP  
CROP  
ADJUSTMENT  
MENU  
ADJUSTMENT  
MENU  
S
R
C
S
R
C
H
O
M
E
Home Menu  
P
I
Pip  
INPUT  
SOURCE  
ADJUSTMENT  
MENU  
P
Adjustment Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
B
O
R
D
E
R
Crop Menu  
Border Menu  
C
R
O
P
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Shadow Menu  
Image Effects Menu  
Crop Menu  
Pip Adjustment Menu  
Border Menu  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Figure 4-39. Input Source Adjustment Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
fåéìí=pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The figure below illustrates a sample Input Source Adjustment Menu:  
INPUT SOURCE ADJUSTMENT  
H
H Size < 100.0% >  
V Size < 100.0% >  
H Position  
640  
475  
0
O
M
E
N
A
V
P
I
P
V Position  
0
B
O
R
D
E
R
A
D
J
C
R
O
P
TRACK SIZE  
3
Figure 4-40. Input Source Adjustment Menu (sample)  
The Input Source Adjustment Menu is virtually identical to the PIP and Key Adjustment  
menus — except that the menu pertains to the source “inside” the PIP or Key, rather than  
the boundaries of the PIP or Key itself. In this way, for example, a PIP can remain in its  
exact location on screen, but you can scale or re-position the image inside the PIP.  
To access the menu:  
•
Press {SRC} from the PIP Adjustment Menu or the Crop Adjustment Menu.  
The Input Source Adjustment Menu is also used to adjust  
Key sources, and the menu functions are identical. The only  
difference is the menu’s title: Key Source Adjustment.  
Important  
fåéìí=pçìêÅÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following Input Source Adjustment Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
•
•
H Size — adjusts the input source’s horizontal size. The “%” value indicates the  
source’s size as a percentage of the original PIP or Key’s horizontal resolution.  
The numeric value is the source’s width in pixels.  
V Size — adjusts the input source’s vertical size. The “%” value indicates the size  
as a percentage of the original PIP or Key’s vertical resolution. The numeric value  
is the source’s height in pixels.  
H Position — indicates the input source’s horizontal position, relative to its default  
horizontal position (00) with no offset. Thus, the value 50 is 50 pixels to the right  
of its default position.  
V Position — indicates the input source’s vertical position, relative to its default  
vertical position (00) with no offset. Thus, the value -10 is 10 pixels below its  
default position.  
72  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
Input Source Adjustment Menu  
•
Enable {TRACK SIZE} to lock H Size and V Size together. Regardless of the  
input source’s current aspect ratio, its size will adjust proportionally when you  
adjust either H or V size.  
When {TRACK SIZE} is disabled, you can do the following:  
~
Adjust H SIZE to adjust only the horizontal size, leaving the vertical size  
alone. In this way, you can stretch the input source horizontally.  
~
Adjust V SIZE to adjust only the vertical size, leaving the horizontal size  
as is. In this way, you can stretch the input source vertically.  
•
•
From the Input Source Adjustment Menu:  
~
~
~
Press {PIP} to jump to the PIP Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “PIP  
Adjustment Menu Functions” section on page 58 for details.  
Press {BORDER} to display the Border Menu. Refer to the “Border  
Menu” section on page 60 for details.  
Press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu. Refer to the “Crop Menu”  
section on page 61 for details.  
From the Key Source Adjustment Menu:  
~
~
~
Press {KEY} to jump to the Key Menu. Refer to the “Key Menu  
Functions” section on page 66 for details.  
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu. Refer to the “Matte Menu”  
section on page 68 for details.  
Press {CROP} to display the Crop Menu. Refer to the “Crop Menu”  
section on page 61 for details.  
To return the input source to its default size and aspect ratio,  
press the RESET button in the Layer Functions Section.  
No other parameters will be affected.  
Note  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Tree  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Description  
Background/DSK Mode  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Functions  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì=qêÉÉ  
The figure below illustrates the Background/DSK Input Setup Menu tree:  
BG/DSK  
H
O
M
E
Home Menu  
BG/DSK  
INPUT SETUP MENU  
K
E
Y
Key Menu  
SELECT  
FORMAT  
FRAME  
MATTE  
GRAB  
FORCE  
ACQUIRE  
Frame Grab  
Menu  
BG Matte  
Menu  
Figure 4-41. Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Tree  
All functions and sub menus are discussed in the following sections.  
74  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì=aÉëÅêáéíáçå  
The Background/DSK Input Setup Menu defines the use of the BG/DSK button — either  
as an unscaled background (BG) or as an unscaled downstream key (DSK).  
To access the menu:  
•
Press the BG/DSK button in the Layer Functions Section. This action causes  
the button to blink, enabling setup and modification.  
The functions that appear on the Background/DSK Input  
Setup Menu change depending on the selected mode —  
either BG (background) or DSK (downstream key). Full  
details are provided below.  
Important  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=jçÇÉ  
The figure below illustrates the top “Mode” line on the Background/DSK Input Setup  
Menu. This line determines whether the BG/DSK button will be used as a background or  
as a downstream key, and the choice also determines the subsequent appearance (and  
available functions) on the menu.  
BG/DSK INPUT SETUP  
H
Mode  
Type  
BG  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Matte  
Figure 4-42. Background/DSK Input Setup Menu — Mode Line  
•
•
When “Mode” is set to BG, the BG/DSK button is used as a background, and the  
following functions are available:  
~
Use the BG/DSK input (DVI) as the live BG source only (but not a DSK  
source).  
~
~
~
Capture a still frame from the BG/DSK input.  
Use a matte color as the background.  
Use a captured still frame as the background.  
When “Mode” is set to DSK, the BG/DSK button is used as a downstream key,  
and the following functions are available:  
~
Use the BG/DSK input (DVI ) as the live DSK source, but not a live  
background source).  
~
~
~
Capture a still frame from the BG/DSK input.  
Use a captured still frame as the background.  
Use a matte color as the background. (In DSK mode, the background  
matte color is still available as a source.)  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì=cìåÅíáçåë  
The figure below illustrates a sample Background/DSK Input Setup Menu:  
BG/DSK INPUT SETUP  
H
Mode  
DSK  
DVI  
O
M
E
N
A
V
Type  
Format  
1024 x 768 @ 60  
K
E
Y
Crop: H Offset  
V Offset  
[ 0 ]  
[ 0 ]  
R
E
S
E
T
To change EDID for BG/DSK,  
use the HOME > SYSTEM > EDID  
menu.  
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
SELECT  
FORMAT  
FRAME  
GRAB  
BG  
MATTE  
FORCE  
ACQUIRE  
Figure 4-43. Background/DSK Input Setup Menu — BG Mode (sample)  
The following functions are provided on the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu:  
•
Mode — determines the use of the BG/DSK button. Refer to the “Background/  
DSK Mode” section on page 75 for details.  
•
Type — selects the desired background type:  
~
When DVI is selected, DVI input video is the background or DSK source.  
In this mode, you can also grab a still frame.  
~
When MATTE is selected, a solid color is used as the background (as  
defined on the Background Matte Menu). Refer to the “Background  
Matte Menu” section on page 77 for menu details.  
~
When FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 is selected, a captured still frame is used as  
the background. This background type cannot be selected until one or  
more frames have been captured.  
•
•
Format — this line performs two functions:  
~
Displays the resolution that is automatically determined by the FORCE  
ACQUIRE function.  
~
With DVI selected, enables you to manually set the resolution of the  
background source. Once the format is selected with the rotary knob,  
press {SELECT FORMAT} to “accept” and activate the selection.  
For the two Crop settings:  
~
~
~
If the background input resolution matches the output resolution, or if the  
output resolution is larger than the background input resolution, the Crop  
settings will be bracketed.  
If the background input resolution is larger than the output resolution, the  
H Offset and V Offset values can be used to choose which portion of the  
background you want to display.  
Press {RESET} to reset the H and V offsets to 0.  
76  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
•
Matte color can be adjusted in each mode.  
~
~
In BG mode, if Matte is selected as the Type, use the {MATTE} button.  
In DSK mode, if DVI is selected as the Type, use the {BG MATTE}  
button.  
Refer to the “Background Matte Menu” section on page 77 for details.  
•
•
In both BG and DSK modes, if DVI is selected as the Type, a “help” message is  
provided for updating the system’s preferred EDID resolution for the BG/DSK  
input. Refer to the “EDID DVI Input Format Menu” section on page 51 for details.  
In DSK mode, press {KEY} to access the DSK Adjustment Menu. Refer to the  
“DSK Adjustment Menu” section on page 78 for details.  
•
•
•
•
Press {SAVE} to store all selected background settings.  
Press {RESET} to reset the H and V “Crop” offsets to 0, if required.  
Press {SELECT FORMAT} to “activate” the selected background format.  
Press {FRAME GRAB} to display the Frame Grab Menu. Refer to the “Frame  
Grab Menu” section page 80 on for details.  
•
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to automatically detect the input signal resolution and  
update the display Format field accordingly.  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=j~ííÉ=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample Background Matte Menu:  
BG MATTE  
H
Red  
0
O
M
E
N
A
V
Green  
Blue  
600  
900  
B
A
C
K
A
D
J
Figure 4-44. Background Matte Menu (sample)  
The Background Matte Menu enables you to create a solid background matte color to use  
behind your PIPs and Keys.  
•
Red — adjust the red component of the background matte color as required, from  
0 to 1024.  
•
Green — adjust the green component of the background matte color as required,  
from 0 to 1024.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
•
Blue — adjust the blue component of the background matte color as required,  
from 0 to 1024.  
The default state is a black matte color.  
Note  
aph=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì  
From the Background/DSK Input Setup Menu, press {KEY} to access the DSK  
Adjustment Menu, a sample of which is shown below:  
DSK ADJUSTMENT  
H
Key Type  
Invert Mode  
Clip  
[ Luma ]  
Off  
O
M
E
N
A
V
0
Gain  
1.00  
512  
Opacity  
Fill Source  
Matte  
A
D
J
INPUT  
SETUP  
MATTE  
Figure 4-45. DSK Adjustment Menu (sample)  
The DSK Adjustment Menu enables you to adjust key and fill parameters for the DSK  
source. The following functions are provided:  
•
•
•
Key Type — displays the type of DSK key, currently fixed as a “Luma” key.  
Invert Mode — enables you to invert the DSK signal.  
Clip — adjusts the threshold of the video that “cuts” into the background. A hole  
will be cut anywhere that foreground luminance is greater than the clip level. The  
hole is then filled with the Fill Source. Adjustment range is 0 to 1023.  
•
•
•
Gain — adjusts the keyer sensitivity, enabling you to change the key’s sharpness.  
Gain only affects the key hole. Adjustment range is 0 to 1023.99.  
Opacity — enables you to adjust the key’s opacity, from fully opaque to fully  
transparent. Adjustment range is 0 to 1024.  
Fill Source — determines the video that fills the key hole:  
~
Self — fills the hole with the key source video itself (e.g., video from a  
character generator).  
~
Matte — fills the hole with a matte color, which can then be adjusted with  
the DSK Matte Adjustment Menu. Refer to the “DSK Matte  
Adjustment Menu“ section on page 79 for details.  
•
Press {INPUT SETUP} to display the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu. Refer to the  
“Background/DSK Input Setup Menu Functions” section on page 76 for details.  
78  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
4. Menu Orientation  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu  
•
Press {MATTE} to display the DSK Matte Adjustment Menu. This softkey only  
appears when the Fill Source is set to Matte. Refer to the “DSK Matte  
Adjustment Menu” section on page 79 for details.  
aph=j~ííÉ=^ÇàìëíãÉåí=jÉåì  
From the DSK Adjustment Menu, press {MATTE} to display the DSK Matte Adjustment  
Menu, a sample of which is shown below:  
DSK MATTE ADJUSTMENT  
B
Red  
0
A
C
K
N
A
V
Green  
Blue  
600  
900  
A
D
J
TRACK RGB  
3
Figure 4-46. DSK Input Setup Menu (sample)  
The DSK Matte Adjustment Menu enables you to adjust the fill color of a matte key. The  
following functions are provided:  
•
•
•
•
Red — adjust the red component of the matte fill as required, from 0 to 1024.  
Green — adjust the green component of the matte fill as required, from 0 to 1024.  
Blue — adjust the blue component of the matte fill, from 0 to 1024.  
Enable the {TRACK RGB} function to adjust Red, Green and Blue proportionally.  
Disable the function to adjust colors individually.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Menu Orientation  
Frame Grab Menu  
cê~ãÉ=dê~Ä=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample Frame Grab Menu:  
DSK FRAME GRAB  
H
O
M
E
FG to Capture  
FG _1  
N
A
V
Capture Format  
[ 1280 x 1024 ]  
B
A
C
K
Temp FG 1 Info:  
File Name  
[ FG1_T ]  
Format  
[ 1280 x 1024 ]  
Perm FG 1 Info:  
File Name  
Format  
[ FG1_P ]  
A
D
J
[ 1280 x 1024 ]  
CAPTURE  
SAVE  
DELETE  
Figure 4-47. Frame Grab Menu (sample)  
The Frame Grab Menu enables you to capture still frames into the system’s three internal  
frame stores. The “source” of the still frames is the system’s BG/DSK input or the scaled  
inputs.  
Once captured, a still frame can be assigned as the input “type” for BG, the DSK or the  
LOGO source.  
The three frame stores utilize PresentationPRO-II’s “temp” (temporary) memory for on-air  
production. During operation, you can overwrite the memory with new captured stills as  
desired — as it takes only a few seconds to capture a still. Note that stills in “temp”  
memory are lost when the system is powered down.  
You can also store three stills in “permanent” flash memory, which will not be lost when the  
system is powered down. At bootup, the contents of flash memory is read into “temp”  
memory for use on-air. It takes several minutes to save a still into permanent memory, and  
this procedure should not be performed on-air. Permanent frames can also be overwritten.  
The contents of a layer can also be captured. In Chapter 6,  
refer to the “Capturing Still Frames” section on page 117 for  
details.  
Note  
80  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Menu Orientation  
Frame Grab Menu  
To access the Frame Grab Menu, use one of the following methods:  
•
Press {FRAME GRAB} from the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu, when “Type” is set  
to DVI (in both the BG and DSK modes).  
•
Press {FRAME GRAB} from the Home Menu.  
The top line of the menu will change accordingly, depending  
on the access path.  
Note  
The following Frame Grab Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
FG to Capture — enables you to select FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3 for capture.  
Capture Format — displays the output resolution. PresentationPRO-II always  
captures a full screen image at the output resolution — regardless of the input  
resolution.  
•
In the Temp FG Info section:  
~
File Name — displays the name of the file in “temp” memory.  
•
The “_T” in the filename indicates that the file’s source is  
temporary memory.  
•
The “_P” in the filename indicates that the file is permanently  
stored. If this indication appears, the permanent file has been  
read into “temp” memory for use on-air.  
~
Format — displays the resolution of the captured frame.  
•
In the Perm FG Info section:  
~
File Name — displays the name of the file in permanent memory.  
•
•
The “_P” indicates that the file is permanently stored.  
[EMPTY] indicates that no frame is stored.  
~
Format — displays the resolution of the permanent frame.  
•
•
Press {CAPTURE} to capture a still into the selected frame store. Once pressed,  
the screen will indicate that the frame is being captured.  
Press {SAVE} to save the captured frame into permanent memory (FG_1, FG_2  
or FG_3). Once pressed, the screen will display a warning:  
System controls will be locked  
for 2 to 3 minutes while saving.  
Save Now?  
Figure 4-48. Background Frame Save Warning  
~
~
Press YES to save the frame. All front panel controls will be locked for  
up to three minutes.  
Press NO to cancel the procedure.  
•
Press {DELETE} to delete the selected frame from permanent storage. This  
button only appears when frames are stored in permanent memory.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
4. Menu Orientation  
LOGO Input Setup Menu  
ildl=fåéìí=pÉíìé=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample LOGO Input Setup Menu:  
LOGO INPUT SETUP  
H
O
M
E
Type  
FG_3  
Temp FG3 Info:  
File Name  
[ FG3_T ]  
Resolution  
[ 1280 x 1024 ]  
A
D
J
S
A
V
E
Figure 4-49. LOGO Input Setup Menu (sample)  
The LOGO Input Setup Menu enables you to select the full screen source for the panel’s  
LOGO button. Choose between the three internal frame stores, or black. Because the  
LOGO is the highest priority layer and downstream of all other effects, the “black” source  
can serve as a convenient way to fade all effects to black — without changing any of the  
image setups underneath the LOGO.  
On factory reset, “black” is the default LOGO source. If you  
capture a frame and assign it as the LOGO source, that  
frame will be the default upon power up.  
Note  
To access the menu:  
•
Press the LOGO button in the Layer Functions Section.  
The following LOGO Input Setup Menu functions are provided:  
•
•
Type — enables you to select still frames FG_1, FG_2, FG_3 or Black as the  
LOGO source. Frames cannot be captured from the Logo Input Setup Menu.  
Refer to the “Frame Grab Menu” section on page 80 for details.  
In the Temp FG Info section:  
~
File Name — displays the selected still frame’s temporary storage  
register.  
~
Resolution — displays the resolution of the selected still frame.  
•
Press {SAVE} to save all LOGO parameters in memory.  
82  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4. Menu Orientation  
Remote Control Menu  
oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä=jÉåì  
The figure below illustrates a sample Remote Control Menu:  
REMOTE CONTROL  
H
O
M
E
Unit ID  
[ 1 ]  
N
A
V
Remote Control  
[ Off ]  
Unit IP: 192.168.0.10  
- - - - - STATUS - - - - -  
No Connection  
Ctrlr IP:  
[ N/A ]  
[ Undefined ]  
[ Internal ]  
Destination  
A
D
J
Router  
SAVE  
Figure 4-50. Remote Control Menu (sample)  
The Remote Control Menu serves two purposes:  
•
When using PresentationPRO-II on a standalone basis, the Remote Control  
Menu is used to set communications parameters for downloading software  
updates via Ethernet.  
•
When PresentationPRO-II is controlled from an external controller, the Remote  
Control Menu is used to set the unit ID and enable/disable remote control itself.  
To access the menu:  
•
Press {REMOTE CONTROL} on the Home Menu.  
The following functions are provided:  
•
Unit ID — When PresentationPRO-II is controlled from an external controller, this  
function sets the ID of the PresentationPRO-II chassis. The ID range is 1 to 32.  
Some external controllers will detect multiple IDs and prompt  
the user to correct the problem. Only the first device will  
connect to the console. Other devices with conflicting IDs will  
be refused a connection.  
Important  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Menu Orientation  
Remote Control Menu  
•
•
Remote Control — enables or disables remote control.  
~
When remote control is on, the {HOME} buttons disappears, the  
PresentationPRO-II front panel is disabled, and all control originates  
from the external controller’s console.  
~
To re-establish “local” control, remote control must be turned off from the  
Remote Control Menu.  
Unit IP — displays the IP address of PresentationPRO-II.  
~
When remote control is on, this address will be assigned by the external  
controller’s DHCP server.  
~
When remote control is on, you can change the PresentationPRO-II  
static IP address. When you navigate to the field, the “ ^ “ symbol  
appears below the first quad, and a {NEXT IP QUAD} button appears:  
•
•
•
Use the ADJ knob to change the quad’s setting.  
Press {NEXT IP QUAD} to advance to the next quad.  
When you reach the last quad, the {SET IP} button appears.  
Press {SET IP} to store the unit’s new Static IP address.  
In the “Status” section:  
•
•
•
•
The top line indicates the connection status with the external controller (e.g., Not  
Connected, Establishing Connection, Connected, etc.).  
Ctrlr IP — With a connection established, displays the IP address of the external  
controller.  
Destination — with a connection established, displays the destination assigned  
to PresentationPRO-II by the external controller.  
Router — with a connection established, displays the utilization of routers:  
~
[Internal] indicates that PresentationPRO-II’s local router is used for  
source connections (the eight rear-panel analog connections plus the  
two rear-panel SD/HD connections).  
~
[External] indicates that an external (upstream) router is used for source  
connections to PresentationPRO-II. In this case, and a minimum of rear-  
panel PresentationPRO-II connections are used — connected directly to  
one or more router outputs.  
In Chapter 6, refer to the “Using Remote Control” section on page 116 for additional  
details.  
84  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
RK==póëíÉã=pÉíìé  
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê  
This chapter provides detailed instructions for setting up the PresentationPRO-II system. It  
is recommended that you follow all procedures in the order outlined below:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setup Prerequisites  
Return to Factory Default  
Touch Screen Calibration  
Output Setup  
Projector Setup  
Quick Input Setup Procedure  
Comprehensive Input Setup  
Setting up the Background  
Setting up the DSK  
Setting up the LOGO  
Saving the Setup  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. System Setup  
Setup Prerequisites  
pÉíìé=mêÉêÉèìáëáíÉë  
Please note the following important setup prerequisites:  
•
•
Ensure that you are familiar with Touch Screen operations. In Chapter 2, refer to  
the “Touch Screen Menu Section” heading on page 17 for instructions.  
In this chapter, when a procedure tells you to “scroll to” a certain line, use the  
rotary knob labelled NAV to move the highlight — or simply touch the desired line  
to highlight it.  
•
When a procedure tells you to “adjust” or “select” a certain parameter, use the  
ADJ rotary knob.  
1
N
A
V
ew  
D_15  
SD YUV  
SMPTE  
[ 1:1 ]  
A
D
J
100.0  
100.0  
ASPECT  
RATIO  
Figure 5-1. Menu Navigation  
Please continue with the “Return to Factory Default” section on page 87.  
86  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. System Setup  
Return to Factory Default  
oÉíìêå=íç=c~Åíçêó=aÉÑ~ìäí  
Prior to starting your setup procedures, it is recommended that you perform a factory reset.  
This procedure guarantees that any previous setups (e.g., those that may have been  
programmed by other users), do not remain in system memory.  
Please note the following important factory default prerequisite:  
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Reset Menu. In Chapter 4, refer to the  
“Reset Menu” section on page 48 for details.  
„
Use the following steps to return the system to factory default values:  
1. From the Home Menu, press {SYSTEM} to access the System Menu.  
2. From the System Menu, press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu.  
3. On the Reset Type line, select FACTORY.  
4. Press {RESET}. When the confirmation screen appears, press {YES} to reset the  
system to factory default values.  
At the conclusion of the factory reset, the system will have the following basic attributes:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
The Home Menu displayed.  
All files have been erased from memory.  
No inputs are selected.  
The PIP button is selected and blinking.  
The output resolution is set to XGA: 1024x768 @ 59.94  
The output raster box is Off.  
Please continue with the “Touch Screen Calibration” section on page 87.  
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=`~äáÄê~íáçå  
Calibrating the Touch Screen is an excellent prerequisite to all setup (and operations)  
procedures.  
„
Use the following steps to calibrate your Touch Screen display:  
1. If required, press {HOME} to display the Home Menu.  
2. Press {DISPLAY} to show the Display Settings Menu.  
3. Press {LCD CAL} to display the first Touch Screen Calibration Menu.  
4. Follow the directions on screen to complete the calibration procedure.  
Please continue with the “Output Setup” section on page 88.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
5. System Setup  
Output Setup  
lìíéìí=pÉíìé  
Please note the following important output setup prerequisite:  
•
Ensure that you know your projector’s native resolution. Refer to your projector’s  
technical manual for details.  
„
Use the following steps to set up the PresentationPRO-II output.  
The PresentationPRO-II output format must match your  
projector’s native resolution.  
Note  
1. From the Home Menu, press {OUTPUT} to access the Output Menu.  
2. On the Format line, select your projector’s native resolution, and a frame rate that  
is consistent with your inputs.  
S Example: If you are using 59.94 NTSC video inputs, run the output at the  
same rate in order to be synchronous.  
In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions“ section on page 129  
for details on all available resolutions.  
3. After selecting a format, press {SELECT FORMAT} to “accept” the selection.  
4. Press {SAVE} to save all output settings in the output file.  
Please continue with the “Projector Setup” section on page 88.  
mêçàÉÅíçê=pÉíìé  
Please note the following important projector setup prerequisite:  
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Output Setup Menu and all sub menus  
included on that screen. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Output Menu Functions”  
section on page 40 for details.  
„
Use the following steps to set up your projector.  
1. From the Home Menu, press {OUTPUT} to access the Output Menu.  
2. Press {TEST PATTERN} to access the Test Pattern Menu.  
a. Scroll to the Type line and select the Burst test pattern.  
b. Scroll to the Raster Box line and enable the Raster Box.  
c. At the projector itself, perform the following adjustments to ensure that  
the PresentationPRO-II output data is properly displayed:  
•
•
Adjust the image for a minimum amount of noise  
Adjust the image such that the entire Raster Box is visible.  
Refer to your projector’s technical manual for information on  
all projector setup and adjustment procedures.  
Note  
d. Once the projector is properly set, disable the Raster Box and select the  
100% Color Bars test pattern.  
88  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. System Setup  
Quick Input Setup Procedure  
e. Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.  
3. Press {SETTINGS} to display the Settings Menu.  
a. Scroll to the Sync Out line and set the desired sync value.  
b. Scroll to the SOG line and enable or disable “sync on green” as required.  
c. Scroll to the Gamma line and set output gamma to match your projector.  
d. Press {BACK} to return to the Output Menu.  
4. Press {SAVE} to save all output settings in the output file.  
5. At the projector itself, perform additional setup procedures (e.g., color balance,  
alignment, etc.) as required.  
6. When all procedures are complete, press {TEST PATTERN} to access the Test  
Pattern Menu, and turn off the test pattern and raster box.  
Please continue with the “Quick Input Setup Procedure” section on page 89.  
nìáÅâ=fåéìí=pÉíìé=mêçÅÉÇìêÉ  
This procedure enables you to quickly acquire and save inputs. Please note the following  
important prerequisites:  
•
Ensure that you have completed your input connection chart. In Chapter 3, refer  
to the “Input Connection Chart” section on page 24 for details and instructions.  
•
•
Ensure that all inputs are properly connected to the chassis.  
Ensure that the system has been “factory” reset. Refer to the “Return to Factory  
Default” section on page 87 for details. After a factory reset, the PIP button will  
be blinking, and no sources will be selected on the Source Selection Bus.  
„
Use the following steps to perform a quick input setup:  
1. On the Source Selection Bus, press an input button, then press TRANS to view  
the source on Program. The system will attempt to acquire the input, and the  
Input Acquisition Menu will be displayed.  
2. If the “Source Acquired” message appears, the acquisition was successful.  
Press {SAVE} to display the Input Menu for the selected source, which enables  
you to fine tune the input if desired. Refer to the “Comprehensive Input Setup”  
section on page 90 for details.  
3. If an error message appears on the Input Acquisition Menu, first check all cable  
connections. You can then:  
~
~
Press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to re-attempt acquisition, or ...  
Press {INPUT} to display the Input Menu without performing a FORCE  
ACQUIRE, and manually adjust input parameters.  
4. Repeat from step 1 for all remaining inputs.  
If you do not press {SAVE} for a selected input, the Input  
Acquisition Menu will continue to appear whenever that  
Important  
source button is pressed.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. System Setup  
Comprehensive Input Setup  
Please note:  
•
When all inputs have been acquired and saved, the Input Acquisition Menu will  
only re-appear in case of LOS (Loss of Signal), or a mismatch between the saved  
file and incoming video. In Chapter 6, refer to the “A Word About LOS” section  
on page 101 for details on LOS.  
•
If you need to fine tune your inputs (or if you change inputs), the Input Menu can  
be accessed at any time by pressing {HOME} > {INPUT}.  
Please continue with the “Comprehensive Input Setup” section on page 90.  
`çãéêÉÜÉåëáîÉ=fåéìí=pÉíìé  
This procedure enables you to perform a more comprehensive input setup, if required.  
If your initial input acquisition was successful (as performed in  
the “Quick Input Setup Procedure” section on page 89),  
there is generally no need to perform all steps in the  
“comprehensive” setup. Typically, you may wish to adjust  
input “sizing” to properly fit each input within the PIP’s  
boundaries — so that no black edges are visible.  
Note  
Please note the following important input setup prerequisites:  
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Input Menu and all sub menus included on  
that screen. In Chapter 4, refer to the “Input Menu Functions” section on  
page 30 for complete details.  
•
Ensure that you have completed your input connection chart. In Chapter 3, refer  
to the “Input Connection Chart” section on page 24 for details and instructions.  
„
Use the following steps to set up inputs:  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP.  
2. On the Source Selection Bus, select the input that you want to set up. The  
button will blink.  
3. From the Home Menu, press {INPUT} to access the Input Menu.  
a. On the menu’s top row, ensure that the selected input is correct (e.g.,  
SRC_1 or SRC_4).  
b. If required, press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the  
optimum setup on the selected input. If the operation is successful, the  
Format, Input Type and Color Space fields should correctly reflect the  
characteristics of the incoming signal.  
c. If required, scroll to the Format line and manually set the resolution of  
the incoming source. In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output  
Resolutions“ section on page 129 for details on all available resolutions.  
d. If you manually selected a format in the previous step, press {SELECT  
FORMAT} to “accept” and activate the selection.  
e. If required, scroll to the Input Type line and set the type of input  
connected to the chassis. Remember that available choices change  
depending on the selected Format.  
90  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
5. System Setup  
Comprehensive Input Setup  
f. If required, scroll to the Color Space line and set the input’s color space.  
Choices include SMPTE and RGB. Note that the system may  
automatically set the Color Space based on the selected Format.  
g. If required, scroll to the Sampling Mode line and set the sampling mode  
for the selected input — either 1:1 or oversample.  
h. Scroll to the Contrast line and set the input’s contrast as desired.  
i. Scroll to the Brightness line and set the input’s brightness as desired.  
j. Scroll to the Gamma line and set the input gamma as desired.  
k. Scroll to the Input Sync Type line and set the type of sync used by the  
selected source. Choices include H/V, CSync (composite sync), SOG  
(sync on green) and Auto.  
l. For a video source that contains film transfer material, scroll to the  
Pulldown Compensation line and enable or disable 3:2 sequence  
detection.  
m. Scroll to the Sync Slice line and adjust the threshold if desired.  
The default Sync Slice level has been optimized for virtually  
all sources that will be encountered and should rarely, if ever,  
require adjustment. For additional details, in Chapter 4 refer  
to the “Input Menu Functions” section on page 30.  
Note  
n. Scroll to the Sharpness line and set the input’s sharpness as desired.  
The adjustment range is from -10 (soft) to 10 (sharp).  
o. Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated file.  
p. Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.  
4. Press {SIZING} to access the Sizing Menu. This menu is context sensitive — it  
changes depending on the selected Sampling Mode.  
a. If 1:1 Sampling is selected, adjust Clock Phase, H Total, H Active,  
H Position, V Total, V Active and V Position as required.  
b. If Oversample is selected, adjust Right Edge, Left Edge, Top Edge or  
Bottom Edge as required, to fit the image precisely in its raster box.  
c. Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated file.  
d. Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.  
5. Press {COLOR BALANCE} to access the Color Balance Menu.  
a. For RGB sources, adjust Red, Green and Blue Contrast and  
Brightness as required.  
b. For Composite, S-Video or YPbPr sources, adjust Saturation and Hue  
as required.  
c. If required, press {RESET ALL} to return to default values.  
d. Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated file.  
e. Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System Setup  
Comprehensive Input Setup  
6. Press {AR} to access the Aspect Ratio Menu.  
a. Scroll to the Mode line and select 16:9, 5:4, 4:3, 3:2, 1:1 or Custom  
aspect ratios.  
b. If Custom is selected, scroll to the Ratio line and enter a custom aspect  
ratio as desired.  
c. Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated file.  
d. Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.  
7. When all of your adjustments are complete, press {CFG} to display the Input  
Configuration Menu.  
If you have not already performed incremental “saves,”  
ensure that you save the input configuration before you exit  
the Input Menu — otherwise all of your adjustments will be  
lost. Because each input has its own file, if you do not save  
the input, the next time the source is selected, the input’s  
default settings will be displayed.  
Important  
In the current version of PresentationPRO-II, the file number  
and name (into which you will save data) automatically default  
to the input number and cannot be changed.  
Note  
a. Press {SAVE} to save the selected input in the designated input file. All  
information is stored in non-volatile flash memory.  
b. If required, press {DELETE} to delete the file.  
c. Press {BACK} to return to the Input Menu.  
8. To set up the next input, repeat the entire procedure from step 2.  
Please continue with the “Setting up the Background” section on page 93.  
92  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. System Setup  
Setting up the Background  
pÉííáåÖ=ìé=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can use the DVI input, a matte color, or a still frame as the  
background source. Please note:  
•
•
•
The system has one DVI connector (BG/DSK) that can be used for either the  
Background or the DSK — but not both simultaneously.  
The BG/DSK input (along with a scaled PIP image) is the source of still frames  
that can be captured and used as the background.  
The function of the BG/DSK input is determined by the “Mode” line on the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu. When set to BG, the background setup procedures  
outlined below apply.  
Select the procedure below for the type of background that you wish to set up:  
•
•
•
•
Programming EDID  
Using a Matte Color as the Background  
Using the DVI Input as the Background  
Using a Still Frame as the Background  
mêçÖê~ããáåÖ=bafa  
The EDID (Extended Display Identification Data) programming procedure is a prerequisite  
for using a live DVI background or for using the DSK. The procedure guarantees proper  
communications at the preferred resolution between PresentationPRO-II’s DVI input and  
your external computer.  
„
Use the following steps to program the PresentationPRO-II EDID:  
1. Ensure that the PresentationPRO-II output format matches your projector’s native  
resolution. Refer to the “Output Setup” section on page 88 for instructions.  
2. Ensure that the computer (or external equipment) that you wish to use as a  
background source is capable of supporting the selected output resolution.  
3. From the HOME MENU, press {SYSTEM} > {EDID} to display the EDID DVI Input  
Format Menu.  
4. Note the Current line, which displays the current EDID video format that resides  
in PresentationPRO-II memory. If this format is already set to the desired  
resolution, no EDID programming is required. You can exit this procedure, and  
continue with other background setup steps as needed.  
5. If a new resolution is required, use the ADJ knob to adjust the Format to the  
preferred setting at which you want to program the EDID.  
6. Press {PROGRAM EDID} to program EDID with the new selected video format. A  
warning message will be shown. Press {YES} to continue.  
7. Once EDID programming is complete on PresentationPRO-II, power down the  
external computer and power it back on.  
8. On your PC’s desktop, right-click to display the Display Properties Window.  
9. Select the Settings Tab, and set the resolution to match that which you just  
programmed into EDID.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
5. System Setup  
Setting up the Background  
rëáåÖ=~=j~ííÉ=`çäçê=~ë=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ  
This procedure enables you to set up the background as a matte color that can be used  
behind a PIP or Key.  
„
Use the following steps to set up a solid matte color as a background source:  
1. (Optional) To ensure that the full background is visible, clear any PIP, Key or  
LOGO from Program.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
3. Scroll to the Mode line and select BG.  
4. Scroll to the Type line and select MATTE.  
5. Press {MATTE} to display the Background Matte Menu.  
6. Adjust the Red, Green and Blue values as desired. At this point, the selected  
color is the new background that you can use behind PIPs and Keys.  
7. Press {BACK} to return to the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu.  
8. Press {SAVE} to save the background input configuration.  
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=asf=fåéìí=~ë=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ  
This procedure enables you to set up the DVI source as the background layer. The DVI  
source originates from an external computer or other external device.  
It is recommended that you perform these steps as a setup procedure. However, once the  
DVI input is set, during live production you can switch the background between a Matte  
color, a still frame and a DVI source.  
Please remember that the BG/DSK input is shared between BG and DSK. If you elect to  
use a live DVI input as the background, it cannot be used as the DSK simultaneously.  
„
Use the following steps to set up a DVI input as a background:  
1. (Optional) To ensure that the full background is visible, clear any PIP, Key, or  
LOGO from Program.  
2. Ensure that the PresentationPRO-II EDID is properly programmed. Refer to the  
“Programming EDID” section on page 93 for instructions.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. Scroll to the Mode line and select BG.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select DVI.  
6. If required, press {FORCE ACQUIRE} to force the system to perform the optimum  
setup on the DVI input. If the operation is successful, Format and Type should  
correctly reflect the characteristics of the incoming signal.  
7. If required, scroll to the Format line and manually set the resolution of the  
incoming source. In Appendix A, refer to the “Input and Output Resolutions“  
section on page 129 for details on all available resolutions.  
8. If you manually selected a format in the previous step, press {SELECT FORMAT}  
to “accept” and activate the selection.  
94  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. System Setup  
Setting up the Background  
9. For the two Crop settings:  
~
~
~
If the input resolution matches the output resolution, or if the output  
resolution is larger than the input resolution, the Crop settings will be  
bracketed.  
If the input resolution is larger than the output resolution, adjust the H  
Offset and V Offset values to choose which portion of the input you want  
to display.  
If required, press {RESET} to reset the H and V offsets to 0.  
10. Press {SAVE} to save the background input configuration.  
rëáåÖ=~=píáää=cê~ãÉ=~ë=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ  
This procedure enables you to capture a still frame image and assign it as the background  
“type.” Please note:  
•
•
As a recommendation, capture still frames into “temporary” memory as a setup  
procedure.  
Once still frames are captured, during live production you can easily switch the  
background between Matte, a DVI input and a still frame.  
It is highly recommended that you save still frames into  
“permanent” flash memory as a setup procedure — as this is  
a very time-consuming step that locks the front panel of  
PresentationPRO-II.  
Important  
„
Use the following steps to assign a captured still frame as the background “type.”  
1. Because the background input is the source of the still frames which you will  
capture, ensure that the background input is properly set up as a DVI source.  
Refer to the “Using the DVI Input as the Background” section on page 94 for  
setup details.  
2. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Capturing Still Frames” section on page 117 for  
instructions on capturing still frames. Up to three frames can be captured into  
temporary memory: FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button will blink and the  
BG/DSK Input Setup Menu will appear.  
4. Scroll to the Mode line and select BG.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select the desired still frame (FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3).  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
5. System Setup  
Setting up the DSK  
pÉííáåÖ=ìé=íÜÉ=aph  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can use the DVI input or a still frame as the DSK source.  
You can also change which source you use for the DSK during the course of a live  
production — provided that the DSK has been properly set up.  
Remember that the BG/DSK input is shared between BG and  
DSK. If you elect to use a “live” DVI input as the background,  
it cannot be used as the DSK simultaneously.  
Note  
Select the procedure below for the type of DSK that you wish to set up:  
•
•
Using the DVI Input as the DSK  
Using a Still Frame as the DSK  
rëáåÖ=íÜÉ=asf=fåéìí=~ë=íÜÉ=aph  
This procedure enables you to set up the DVI source as the DSK’s input type. It is  
recommended that you perform these steps as a setup procedure. However, once the  
DSK is set up, during live production you can switch it between a captured still frame and  
the DVI source.  
„
Use the following steps to set up the DVI input as your DSK source:  
1. Ensure that the PresentationPRO-II EDID is properly programmed. Refer to the  
“Programming EDID” section on page 93 for instructions.  
2. If you have not already set up the BG/DSK input as a DVI source, follow the setup  
procedure as outlined in the “Using the DVI Input as the Background” section  
on page 94.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. Scroll to the Mode line and select DSK.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select DVI.  
6. Press {KEY} to display the DSK Adjustment Menu.  
7. Adjust key parameters as required. In Chapter 4, refer to the “DSK Adjustment  
Menu” section on page 78 for details.  
96  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. System Setup  
Setting up the DSK  
rëáåÖ=~=píáää=cê~ãÉ=~ë=íÜÉ=aph  
This procedure enables you to capture a still frame image and assign it as the “type” for the  
DSK. Please note:  
•
As a recommendation, capture still frames into “temporary” memory as a setup  
procedure.  
•
Once still frames are captured, during live production you can switch the DSK  
between the DVI input and a Still Frame.  
It is highly recommended that you save still frames into  
“permanent” flash memory as a setup procedure — as this is  
a very time-consuming step that locks the front panel of  
PresentationPRO-II.  
Important  
„
Use the following steps to assign a captured still frame as the DSK “type.”  
1. Ensure that BG/DSK input is properly set up as a DVI source. This input is the  
source of the still frames which you will capture. Refer to the “Using the DVI  
Input as the Background” section on page 94 for setup details.  
2. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Capturing Still Frames” section on page 117 for  
instructions on capturing still frames. Up to three frames can be captured into  
temporary memory: FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. Scroll to the Mode line and select DSK.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select the desired still frame: FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5. System Setup  
Setting up the LOGO  
pÉííáåÖ=ìé=íÜÉ=ildl  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can set the LOGO source as a captured still frame, or leave  
it as Black (the default setting upon factory reset). You can also change which source you  
use during live production.  
„
Use the following steps to set up the LOGO source:  
1. Ensure that the background input is properly set up as a DVI source. This input  
(along with scaled PIP images) is the source of still frames that you can capture.  
Refer to the “Using the DVI Input as the Background” section on page 94 for  
setup details.  
2. In Chapter 6, refer to the “Capturing Still Frames” section on page 117 for  
instructions on capturing still frames. Up to three frames can be captured: FG_1,  
FG_2 and FG_3.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press the LOGO button. The button blinks and  
the LOGO Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. On the Type line, select the desired still frame (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3), or select  
Black.  
Because the LOGO is the highest priority layer and  
downstream of all other effects, the “black” source can serve  
as a convenient way to fade all effects to black.  
Note  
Please continue with the “Saving the Setup” section on page 98.  
p~îáåÖ=íÜÉ=pÉíìé  
When all system setup procedures have been completed:  
1. From the Home Menu press {SYSTEM} to display the System Menu.  
2. Press {SAVE} to save all settings in the system file.  
Once pressed, the Touch Screen menu reads “Saving System Configuration.” This step  
ensures that when you cycle power, the PresentationPRO-II returns to the state in which it  
was configured at the time of the “save.”  
98  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
SK==léÉê~íáçåë  
få=qÜáë=`Ü~éíÉê  
This chapter includes operational instructions for all PresentationPRO-II modes and  
functions. The following topics are discussed:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Prerequisites  
Operational Configuration  
Working with Layers  
Working with Layer Functions  
Working with Transitions  
Using Remote Control  
Capturing Still Frames  
When a sequence of menu selections is required to complete  
a given procedure, the ">" symbol is used to divide each  
Note  
successive menu pick.  
S Example: To access the Sizing Menu, press  
{HOME} > {INPUT} > {SIZING}.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6. Operations  
Prerequisites  
mêÉêÉèìáëáíÉë  
Prior to using the PresentationPRO-II system in a live event, please ensure the following:  
•
All system inputs, background (or DSK) and the LOGO are properly configured.  
In Chapter 5, refer to the following sections for details:  
~
~
~
~
“Comprehensive Input Setup“ on page 90.  
“Setting up the Background“ on page 93.  
“Setting up the DSK“ on page 96.  
“Setting up the LOGO“ on page 98.  
•
•
Ensure that you are familiar with all front panel controls. In Chapter 2, refer to the  
“PresentationPRO-II Front Panel“ section on page 15 for details.  
Ensure that you are familiar with all system menus, and in particular, the  
operational menus. In Chapter 4, refer to the following sections for details:  
~
~
~
Refer to the “PIP Adjustment Menu“ section on page 57 for details on  
all PIP adjustments.  
Refer to the “Key Menu“ section on page 65 for details on all Key  
adjustments.  
Refer to the “Input Source Adjustment Menu“ section on page 71 for  
details on all input source adjustments.  
As you review each function in this chapter, it is  
recommended that you try out each mode and feature at the  
PresentationPRO-II panel itself — using a fully configured  
system consisting of a projector, Program monitor, and all the  
necessary sources.  
Tip  
100  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Operations  
Operational Configuration  
léÉê~íáçå~ä=`çåÑáÖìê~íáçå  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
Monitor Layout  
Touch Screen Calibration  
A Word About LOS  
•
•
•
jçåáíçê=i~óçìí  
Use the following diagram as a recommended layout for your monitor.  
Program  
Figure 6-1. Application Layout  
For optimum viewing and utility, place your Program monitor in close proximity to the  
chassis, either above or immediately to the right.  
qçìÅÜ=pÅêÉÉå=`~äáÄê~íáçå  
As an excellent prerequisite to all operating procedures, it is recommended that you  
calibrate the Touch Screen.  
„
Use the following steps to calibrate your Touch Screen display:  
1. If required, press {HOME} to display the Home Menu.  
2. Press {DISPLAY} to show the Display Settings Menu.  
3. Press {LCD CAL} to display the first Touch Screen Calibration Menu.  
4. Follow directions on screen to complete the calibration procedure.  
^=tçêÇ=^Äçìí=ilp  
On rare occasion, you can experience LOS (loss of signal) — typically due to a poor video  
or computer connection. In these cases, PresentationPRO-II obeys a precise set of rules:  
•
•
•
Scaler LOS — If there is a LOS for a video signal inside a scaler (PIP or KEY),  
the video switches to black, but the scaler remains in its current size and position.  
Background LOS — If there is a LOS for the background DVI input, the video  
switches to the background’s selected matte color.  
DSK LOS — If there is a LOS for the DSK, the system switches the DSK Off  
(specifically, selecting "none" as the type).  
In each case, when the video signal recovers, the system re-enables it as before.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=i~óÉêë  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Working with PIPs  
Modifying PIPs  
Working with Keys  
Modifying Keys and DSKs  
Background and DSK Transitions  
LOGO Transitions  
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=mfmë  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can perform the following types of PIP transitions:  
•
•
•
•
Transitioning a PIP to Program  
Removing a PIP from Program  
Cancelling a PIP Transition  
Changing a PIP to a KEY  
PIP  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=~=mfm=íç=mêçÖê~ã  
„
Use the following steps to transition a PIP to Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, ensure that the PIP button is blinking. If not,  
press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu. Please note:  
~
If there is no source on Program, the last source associated with the PIP  
will blink on the Source Selection Bus.  
~
If there is a source currently on Program, it will be lit solid on the Source  
Selection Bus.  
3. On the Source Selection Bus, select a new source. The button blinks to indicate  
that the source is "pending."  
~
~
If there is no source on Program, only the pending source will blink.  
If there is a source currently on Program, the pending source will blink  
and the current source will be lit solid.  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The current PIP transitions off,  
the new PIP transitions on, and the TRANS button lights during the interval.  
From this point forward, transitioning a PIP is a simple two-  
button sequence: (1) select source, (2) press TRANS.  
Tip  
102  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
5. Adjust the PIP’s size, position, border, shadow, source image, cropping and  
"special effects" as desired. Refer to the “Modifying PIPs“ section on page 104.  
Ensure that you establish the PIP’s initial size and position  
before your live event begins.  
Tip  
oÉãçîáåÖ=~=mfm=Ñêçã=mêçÖê~ã  
„
Use the following steps to remove a PIP from Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
CLEAR  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, ensure that the PIP button is blinking. If not,  
press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu. On the Source Selection Bus,  
the source associated with the PIP will be lit solid.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press CLEAR to "pend" the removal of the PIP.  
The CLEAR button will blink to indicate that the operation is pending.  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
`~åÅÉääáåÖ=~=mfm=qê~åëáíáçå  
„
Use the following steps to cancel a PIP transition.  
S Assumption: A PIP transition has been selected, and the PIP button is  
blinking.  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP. The button stops blinking, and the  
pending transition is cancelled. Please note:  
~
~
If there is no source currently on Program, the PIP button turns off.  
If there is a source currently on Program, the PIP button stops blinking  
but remains lit.  
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=~=mfm=íç=~=hbv  
„
Use the following steps to change a PIP to a Key.  
S Assumption: A PIP is currently on Program.  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press KEY. Please note:  
~
~
The KEY button blinks and the PIP button remains lit solid.  
The Key Menu appears, and the source associated with the PIP lights  
solid on the Source Selection Bus.  
3. If desired, select a new key source on the Source Selection Bus. The pending  
source blinks and the current PIP source remains lit solid.  
If you do not select a new source, the current source will be  
used. It will transition off as a PIP, and back on as a Key.  
Note  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The current PIP transitions off  
and the new KEY transitions on. The TRANS button lights during the interval.  
5. Adjust the Key’s clip, gain, mode, opacity, fill source, size and position, crop,  
source size and special effects desired. Refer to the “Modifying Keys and  
DSKs“ section on page 107 for details.  
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=mfmë  
„
Use the following steps to modify a PIP:  
S Assumption: A PIP is currently on Program.  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, ensure that the PIP button is blinking. If not,  
press PIP to display the PIP Adjustment Menu. On the Source Selection Bus,  
the source associated with the PIP will be solid.  
2. Size and Position — Adjust H Size, V Size, H Position and V Position as  
desired. In Chapter 4, refer to the "PIP Adjustment Menu Description" section  
on page 58 for menu details.  
Because the PIP is on Program, it is recommended that you  
make slow, smooth adjustments during a live production.  
Note  
3. Source Size — From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {SRC} to display the  
Input Source Adjustment Menu. Use the menu to adjust the source image’s  
size and position within the PIP. In Chapter 4, refer to the "Input Source  
Adjustment Menu Description" section on page 72 for menu details.  
4. Crop — From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {CROP} to display the Crop  
Adjustment Menu. Use the menu to select the type of crop, the aspect ratio, and  
the image’s H and V size. In Chapter 4, refer to the "Crop Menu" section on  
page 61 for menu details.  
5. Border — From the PIP Adjustment Menu, press {BORDER} to display the  
Border Menu. Use the menu to select the border’s style, color and size. In  
Chapter 4, refer to the "Border Menu" section on page 60 for menu details.  
6. Shadow — From the Border Menu, press {SHADOW} to display the Shadow  
Menu. Use the menu to choose the shadow’s size, position and transparency. In  
Chapter 4, refer to the "Shadow Menu" section on page 62 for menu details.  
7. Special Effects — From the Border Menu, press {EFX} to display the Image  
Effects Menu. Use the menu to select monochrome or color mode, to modify  
chroma and hue, to invert the color, and to set a strobe effect. In Chapter 4, refer  
to the "Image Effects Menu" section on page 63 for menu details.  
8. Global Functions — Remember that the following global functions are always  
available to you:  
~
~
~
Press Reset to reset the current effect (e.g., PIP, Key, crop, etc.) to a  
nominal default value.  
Press Full Screen to bring the PIP to full screen, using the source’s  
height as the defining factor.  
Press Freeze to freeze the PIP. Press again to unfreeze.  
104  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=hÉóë  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can perform the following types of Key transitions:  
•
•
•
•
Transitioning a Key to Program  
Removing a Key from Program  
Cancelling a Key Transition  
Changing a KEY to a PIP  
KEY  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=~=hÉó=íç=mêçÖê~ã  
„
Use the following steps to transition a Key to Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, ensure that the KEY button is blinking. If not,  
press KEY to display the Key Adjustment Menu. Please note:  
~
If there is no source on Program, the last source associated with the Key  
will blink on the Source Selection Bus.  
~
If there is a key source currently on Program, it will be lit solid on the  
Source Selection Bus.  
3. On the Source Selection Bus, select a new key source. The button blinks to  
indicate that the source is "pending."  
~
~
If there is no source on Program, only the pending source will blink.  
If there is a source currently on Program, the pending source will blink  
and the current source will be lit solid.  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The current Key transitions off,  
the new Key transitions on, and the TRANS button lights during the interval.  
From this point forward, transitioning a Key is a simple two-  
button sequence: (1) select key source, (2) press TRANS.  
Tip  
5. Adjust the Key’s clip, gain, mode, opacity, fill source, size and position, crop,  
source size and special effects desired. Refer to the “Modifying Keys and  
DSKs“ section on page 107 for details.  
Ensure that you establish the Key’s initial clip, gain and  
opacity parameters before your live event begins.  
Tip  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
oÉãçîáåÖ=~=hÉó=Ñêçã=mêçÖê~ã  
„
Use the following steps to remove a Key from Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
CLEAR  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, ensure that the KEY button is blinking. If not,  
press Key to display the Key Adjustment Menu. On the Source Selection Bus,  
the source associated with the Key will be lit solid.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press CLEAR to "pend" the removal of the Key.  
The CLEAR button will blink to indicate that the operation is pending.  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
`~åÅÉääáåÖ=~=hÉó=qê~åëáíáçå  
„
Use the following steps to cancel a Key transition.  
S Assumption: A Key transition has been selected, and the KEY button is  
blinking.  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press KEY. The button stops blinking, and the  
pending transition is cancelled. Please note:  
~
~
If there is no source currently on Program, the KEY button turns off.  
If there is a source currently on Program, the KEY button stops blinking  
but remains lit.  
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=~=hbv=íç=~=mfm  
„
Use the following steps to change a Key to a PIP.  
S Assumption: A Key is currently on Program.  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP. Please note:  
~
~
The PIP button blinks and the KEY button remains lit solid.  
The PIP Adjustment Menu appears, and the source associated with the  
Key lights solid on the Source Selection Bus.  
3. If desired, select a new PIP source on the Source Selection Bus. The pending  
source blinks and the current Key source remains lit solid.  
If you do not select a new source, the current source will be  
used. It will transition off as a Key, and back on as a PIP.  
Note  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The current Key transitions off  
and the new PIP transitions on. The TRANS button lights during the interval.  
5. Adjust the new PIP’s size, position, border, shadow, source image, cropping and  
"special effects" as desired. Refer to the “Modifying PIPs“ section on page 104  
for details.  
106  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
jçÇáÑóáåÖ=hÉóë=~åÇ=aphë  
„
Use the following steps to modify a Key or DSK:  
S Assumption: A Key (or DSK) is currently on Program.  
1. Use one of two methods to access the key adjustment menus:  
~
For a Key — In the Layer Functions Section, press KEY to activate the  
current Key for modification. The Key Menu appears.  
~
For a DSK — Press BG/DSK to display the BG/DSK Input Setup Menu  
appears. Then press {KEY} to display the DSK Adjustment Menu.  
2. Clip, Gain, Mode, Opacity — Use the controls to adjust clip, gain, invert mode  
and opacity. In Chapter 4:  
~
~
Refer to the "Key Menu Description" section on page 66.  
Refer to the "DSK Adjustment Menu" section on page 78.  
Because the Key is on Program, it is recommended that you  
make slow, smooth adjustments during a live production.  
Note  
3. Fill Source — Use the controls in the Key Menu to select a self or matte fill key.  
If Matte is selected, press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu, with which you  
can choose the matte fill color. In Chapter 4, refer to the "Matte Menu" section  
on page 68 for menu details.  
S For a Key only:  
4. Size and Position — From the Key Menu, press {SIZE & POS} to display the  
Key Adjustment Menu. Use the controls to size and position the Key. In  
Chapter 4, see the "Key Adjustment Menu" section on page 69 for menu details.  
5. Crop — From the Key Menu, press {CROP} to display the Crop Adjustment  
Menu. Use the menu to select the type of crop, the aspect ratio, and the image’s  
H and V size. In Chapter 4, refer to the "Crop Menu" section on page 61 for  
menu details.  
6. Source Size — From the Crop Menu, press {SRC} to display the Key Source  
Adjustment Menu. Use the menu to adjust the source image’s size and position  
within the PIP. In Chapter 4, refer to the "Input Source Adjustment Menu  
Description" section on page 72 for menu details.  
7. Special Effects — From the Matte Menu, press {EFX} to display the Image  
Effects Menu. Use the menu to select monochrome or color mode, to modify  
chroma and hue, to invert the color, and to set a strobe effect. In Chapter 4, refer  
to the "Image Effects Menu" section on page 63 for menu details.  
8. Global Functions — Remember that the following global functions are always  
available to you:  
~
~
Press Reset to reset the current effect to a default value.  
(For a Key only) Press Full Screen to bring the Key to full screen, using  
the source’s height as the defining factor.  
~
Press Freeze to freeze the Key. Press again to unfreeze.  
S For a Key and a DSK:  
9. Transition — Transition the new "look" to program with a MIX or WIPE. Refer to  
the “Working with Transitions“ section on page 115 for details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=~åÇ=aph=qê~åëáíáçåë  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can perform the following types of background and DSK  
transitions:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Setting the Background Mode  
Transitioning to a Matte Color  
Transitioning to a Live DVI Background  
Transitioning to a Still Frame  
Keying the DVI source in DSK Mode  
Keying a Still Frame in DSK Mode  
Changing Background Matte Colors in DSK Mode  
Cancelling a Background or DSK Transition  
Clearing a Background or DSK  
pÉííáåÖ=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=jçÇÉ  
„
Use the following steps to set the background mode:  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
BG/DSK  
2. On the Mode line, set the desired mode:  
~
To work in background mode, select BG. This enables you to use a color  
matte, a still frame, or a live DVI source as the background layer.  
~
To work in DSK mode, select DSK. This enables you to use a still frame  
or a live DVI source as the downstream key. You can also set a  
background matte color, which will appear under a PIP or Key.  
Ensure that you set the background mode before your live  
event begins.  
Tip  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to switch  
seamlessly between BG and DSK modes during a live event.  
Remember, though, that any pending background (or DSK)  
will not be seen until it transitions to Program, so it is to your  
advantage to preset your background colors, DVI sources,  
key clips, etc.  
Note  
108  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=íç=~=j~ííÉ=`çäçê  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to transition from any BG or DSK mode to a  
matte color — or from a matte color to another matte color.  
„
Use the following steps to transition to a background matte color:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
3. On the Mode line, select BG — or simply verify that it is already selected.  
4. Scroll to the Type line and select Matte. The current background will not change.  
5. If you wish to set (or change) the background matte color:  
~
~
Press {MATTE} to display the Matte Menu.  
On the menu, adjust the Red, Green and Blue matte values as desired.  
You will not see the colors change on Program.  
6. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=íç=~=iáîÉ=asf=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to transition from any BG or DSK mode to a  
live DVI background.  
„
Use the following steps to transition to a live DVI background:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. Ensure that your DVI background is properly set up. In Chapter 5, refer to the  
“Setting up the Background“ section on page 93 for details.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. On the Mode line, select BG — or simply verify that it is already selected.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select DVI. The current background will not change.  
6. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=íç=~=píáää=cê~ãÉ  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to transition from any BG or DSK mode to a  
still frame background — or from a still frame to another still frame.  
„
Use the following steps to transition a still frame to Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. Ensure that the desired still frames have been captured. Refer to the “Still Frame  
Capture Overview“ section on page 117 for details.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. On the Mode line, select BG — or simply verify that it is already selected.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3. The current background  
will not change.  
6. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
hÉóáåÖ=íÜÉ=asf=ëçìêÅÉ=áå=aph=jçÇÉ  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to transition from any BG or DSK mode to a  
DSK — using the DVI input as the key source.  
„
Use the following steps to key the live DVI source in DSK mode:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. Ensure that your DVI background is properly set up. In Chapter 5, refer to the  
“Setting up the Background“ section on page 93 for details.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. On the Mode line, select DSK — or simply verify that it is already selected.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select DVI. The current background will not change.  
6. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
Ensure that you establish the Downstream Key’s initial clip,  
gain and opacity parameters before your live event begins.  
Tip  
7. Modify the DSK as required. Refer to the "Modifying Keys and DSKs" section  
on page 107 for details.  
When you key the DVI source in DSK mode and your PIP is  
not full screen, the background matte is visible as the bottom  
layer in the effect — behind the PIP. Refer to the "Changing  
Background Matte Colors in DSK Mode" section on  
page 111 for details on changing the matte color.  
Important  
hÉóáåÖ=~=píáää=cê~ãÉ=áå=aph=jçÇÉ  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to transition from any BG or DSK mode to a  
DSK — using a still frame as the key source. You can also change from one still frame to  
another still frame.  
„
Use the following steps to key a still frame in DSK mode:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. Ensure that the desired still frames have been captured. Refer to the “Still Frame  
Capture Overview“ section on page 117 for details.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. On the Mode line, select DSK — or simply verify that it is already selected.  
5. Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.  
110  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
6. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
Ensure that you establish the Downstream Key’s initial clip,  
gain and opacity parameters before your live event begins.  
Tip  
7. Modify the DSK as required. Refer to the "Modifying Keys and DSKs" section  
on page 107 for details.  
When you key a still frame in DSK mode and your PIP is not  
full screen, the background matte is visible as the bottom  
layer in the effect — behind the PIP. Refer to the "Changing  
Background Matte Colors in DSK Mode" section on  
page 111 for details on changing the matte color.  
Important  
`Ü~åÖáåÖ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=j~ííÉ=`çäçêë=áå=aph=jçÇÉ  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to change the background matte color while  
the system is in DSK mode.  
„
Use the following steps to set the background matte color in DSK mode:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
3. Press {BG MATTE} to display the Background Matte Menu.  
4. On the menu, adjust the Red, Green and Blue matte values as desired. You will  
not see the color change on Program.  
5. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS to change the background matte  
color. The TRANS button lights during the interval, and at the conclusion of the  
transition, the Home Menu appears.  
`~åÅÉääáåÖ=~=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=çê=aph=qê~åëáíáçå  
„
Use the following steps to cancel a background or DSK transition.  
S Assumptions: A background or DSK transition has been selected, and the  
BG/DSK button is blinking.  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button stops blinking, the  
pending transition is cancelled, and the Home Menu is displayed.  
`äÉ~êáåÖ=~=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=çê=aph  
The PresentationPRO-II system enables you to clear any BG or DSK from Program —  
back to the current background matte color. Note that a background matte color itself  
cannot be cleared from Program. However, you can change its color:  
•
If you’re working in BG mode, refer to the "Transitioning to a Matte Color"  
section on page 109 for details.  
•
If you’re working in DSK mode, refer to the "Changing Background Matte  
Colors in DSK Mode" section on page 111 for details.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
„
Use the following steps to clear the background or the DSK from Program.  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
CLEAR  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the BG/  
DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press CLEAR to "pend" the removal of the  
background or DSK. The CLEAR button will blink.  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
Please note:  
•
If you’re working in BG mode, at the conclusion of the transition, the background  
Type will automatically change to Matte.  
•
If you’re working in DSK mode, at the conclusion of the transition, the background  
Type will not change.  
112  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
6. Operations  
Working with Layers  
ildl=qê~åëáíáçåë  
With PresentationPRO-II, you can perform the following types of LOGO transitions:  
•
•
Transitioning the LOGO to Program  
Clearing the LOGO from Program  
LOGO  
qê~åëáíáçåáåÖ=íÜÉ=ildl=íç=mêçÖê~ã  
Using the LOGO source, you can transition a captured still frame to Program at the highest  
priority layer — covering all effects underneath.  
In addition to its use as a full screen downstream graphic, the  
LOGO can also be used as a convenient “black preview”  
function. When the LOGO source is set to Black, you can  
fade to black at any time, from any simple or complex setup,  
without affecting the underlying "look."  
Tip  
„
Use the following steps to transition the LOGO to Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. Ensure that the desired still frames have been captured. Refer to the “Still Frame  
Capture Overview“ section on page 117 for details.  
3. In the Layer Functions Section, press LOGO. The button blinks and the LOGO  
Input Setup Menu appears.  
4. Scroll to the Type line and select FG_1, FG_2, FG_3 or Black.  
5. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
`äÉ~êáåÖ=íÜÉ=ildl=Ñêçã=mêçÖê~ã  
„
Use the following steps to clear the LOGO from Program:  
1. Ensure that you have preset the desired transition type and rate. Refer to the  
"Working with Transitions" section on page 115 for details.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press TRANS. The TRANS button lights during  
the interval, and at the conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears.  
This simple shortcut works because the LOGO is the only layer visible on  
Program, and thus the only element that can transition off.  
If desired, you can also clear the LOGO by pressing LOGO,  
CLEAR, TRANS.  
Note  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6. Operations  
Working with Layer Functions  
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=i~óÉê=cìåÅíáçåë  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
Using Full Screen  
Using Freeze  
Using Reset  
•
•
•
rëáåÖ=cìää=pÅêÉÉå  
„
Use the following steps to take the active PIP or Key to full screen:  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP or KEY as required. The button  
blinks, and the associated source blinks on the Source Selection Bus.  
FULL  
SCREEN  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press Full Screen. The source’s height will be  
used as the parameter that define’s the full screen size. If borders are ON, they  
will be taken into account so that they are visible.  
rëáåÖ=cêÉÉòÉ  
„
Use the following steps to freeze a PIP or KEY on Program. This function is useful for  
PIPs and Keys that use video and animated graphics.  
FREEZE  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP or KEY as required. The button  
blinks, and the associated source blinks on the Source Selection Bus.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press FREEZE. The button lights solid to  
indicate that a “freeze” is associated with the current PIP or Key.  
3. To restore motion to the source, ensure that PIP or KEY is selected (and blinking),  
then press FREEZE.  
rëáåÖ=oÉëÉí  
The Reset function is context sensitive. It is used to reset the current effect to a nominal  
default value.  
RESET  
„
Use the following steps to reset a specific PIP or Key modification parameter:  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP or KEY as required. The button  
blinks, and the associated source blinks on the Source Selection Bus.  
2. Ensure that FREEZE is off. Frozen PIPs or Keys cannot be reset.  
3. If required, navigate to the "menu" whose specific function you want to reset (e.g.,  
borders, shadows, special effects, size, etc).  
4. In the Layer Functions Section, press RESET to reset the current effect.  
114  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                     
6. Operations  
Working with Transitions  
tçêâáåÖ=ïáíÜ=qê~åëáíáçåë  
„
Use the following steps to perform a Mix (or "dissolve"):  
1. Set up the desired PIP, Key, BG, DSK or LOGO transition in the normal manner.  
2. Preset the desired transition rate:  
TRANS  
a. Press {HOME} > {EFFECTS} to display the Effects Menu.  
b. Scroll to the Transition Type line and select MIX.  
c. Scroll to the Transition Rate line and select the desired rate, in 0.1  
second increments.  
3. In the Transition Section, press TRANS to dissolve the setup to Program. At the  
conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears  
„
Use the following steps to perform a Wipe:  
1. Set up the desired PIP, Key, BG, DSK or LOGO transition in the normal manner.  
2. Preset the desired transition rate, wipe effect and wipe edge:  
a. Press {HOME} > {EFFECTS} to display the Effects Menu.  
b. Scroll to the Transition Type line and select the desired wipe pattern.  
c. Scroll to the Transition Edge field and select the desired wipe edge.  
d. Scroll to the Transition Rate line and select the desired rate, in 0.1  
second increments.  
3. In the Transition Section, press TRANS to wipe the setup to Program. At the  
conclusion of the transition, the Home Menu appears  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
6. Operations  
Using Remote Control  
rëáåÖ=oÉãçíÉ=`çåíêçä  
When PresentationPRO-II is controlled from an external controller, the Remote Control  
Menu is used to set the unit ID and enable/disable remote control itself. Please note the  
following prerequisites:  
•
•
Ensure that you know the unit IDs currently in use by the external controller. The  
external controller will not allow PresentationPRO-II to connect if a duplicate ID is  
assigned.  
If an external router is to be connected to PresentationPRO-II, ensure that the  
proper physical connections have been made, and that the router is properly  
configured from the external controller.  
„
Use the following steps to place PresentationPRO-II under remote control:  
1. Press {HOME} > {REMOTE CONTROL} to access the Remote Control Menu.  
2. Set the Unit ID to a value that is not used within the external controller’s system.  
3. Scroll to the Remote Control line turn it ON.  
When remote control is on, the {HOME} buttons disappears,  
the PresentationPRO-II front panel is disabled, and all control  
originates from the external controller.  
Important  
4. In the “Status” section, verify the following:  
~
~
~
~
Connection status with the external controller.  
Ctrlr IP — the IP address of the external controller.  
Destination — the destination assigned to PresentationPRO-II.  
Router — the utilization of routers, either internal or external.  
„
Use the following steps to reestablish local PresentationPRO-II control:  
1. On the Remote Control Menu, scroll to the Remote Control line turn it OFF. The  
{HOME} buttons reappears, the PresentationPRO-II front panel is re-enabled, and  
all control now originates locally.  
116  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
6. Operations  
Capturing Still Frames  
`~éíìêáåÖ=píáää=cê~ãÉë  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
Still Frame Capture Overview  
Capturing Still Frames from the Background Input  
Capturing Still Frames from a PIP or Key  
Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory  
píáää=cê~ãÉ=`~éíìêÉ=lîÉêîáÉï  
PresentationPRO-II enables you to capture still frames into the system’s three internal  
frame stores. You can use the system’s DVI input as a full screen source, or within the  
mixer, you can use a PIP or Key as a full screen source.  
Note that within the mixer, all PIP and Key captures must occur on Program, with the  
desired source visible. However, the system only captures the PIP or Key in its current size  
and position on screen, with no borders and with black as the background.  
Please note the following important prerequisites to all frame grab procedures:  
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Background/DSK Input Setup Menu. In  
Chapter 4, refer to the “Background/DSK Input Setup Menu“ section on  
page 74.  
•
Ensure that you are familiar with the Frame Grab Menu. In Chapter 4, refer to the  
“Frame Grab Menu“ section on page 80 for details.  
`~éíìêáåÖ=píáää=cê~ãÉë=Ñêçã=íÜÉ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇ=fåéìí  
„
Use the following steps to capture a still frame from the background DVI input:  
1. Ensure that the background input is properly set up as a DVI input. In Chapter 5,  
refer to the "Using the DVI Input as the Background" section on page 94 for  
instructions.  
2. In the Layer Functions Section, press BG/DSK. The button blinks and the  
Background/DSK Input Setup Menu appears.  
3. Scroll to the Mode line and select either BG or DSK.  
4. Scroll to the Type line and select DVI.  
5. Press {FRAME GRAB} to display the Frame Grab Menu.  
6. On the FG to Capture line, select the temporary frame store into which the still  
will be captured (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3).  
7. Press {CAPTURE} to capture the still. Once pressed, the screen will indicate that  
the frame is being captured. A pop-up message confirms the procedure.  
8. Repeat the procedure from step 6 to capture additional stills from the background  
input. Remember that you can always overwrite FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
6. Operations  
Capturing Still Frames  
Please note:  
•
The captured still(s) can now be assigned as the input “type” for BG, DSK or  
LOGO. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Using a Still Frame as the Background"  
section on page 95 for instructions.  
•
Captured stills reside in temporary memory. If the system is powered down or  
reset, the stills will be lost. To save stills in permanent memory, refer to the  
"Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory" section on page 119.  
`~éíìêáåÖ=píáää=cê~ãÉë=Ñêçã=~=mfm=çê=hÉó  
„
Use the following steps to capture a still frame from a PIP or Key:  
1. In the Layer Functions Section, press PIP or KEY as required. The button  
blinks, and the associated source blinks on the Source Selection Bus.  
2. Adjust the PIP or Key’s size and position in the normal way. Remember that the  
system will capture the layer in its current size and position, with no borders —  
and with black as the background.  
3. Press {HOME} > {FRAME GRAB} to display the Frame Grab Menu.  
4. On the FG to Capture line, select the temporary frame store into which the still  
will be captured (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3).  
5. Press {CAPTURE} to capture the still. Once pressed, the screen will indicate that  
the frame is being captured. A pop-up message confirms the procedure.  
6. Repeat the procedure from step 1 to capture additional stills from a layer.  
Remember that you can always overwrite FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3.  
Please note:  
•
The captured still(s) can now be assigned as the input “type” for BG, DSK or  
LOGO. In Chapter 5, refer to the "Using a Still Frame as the Background"  
section on page 95 for instructions.  
•
Captured stills reside in temporary memory. If the system is powered down or  
reset, the stills will be lost. To save stills in permanent memory, refer to the  
"Saving Still Frames in Permanent Memory" section on page 119.  
118  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Operations  
Capturing Still Frames  
p~îáåÖ=píáää=cê~ãÉë=áå=mÉêã~åÉåí=jÉãçêó  
„
Use the following steps to save a captured still into permanent memory.  
1. Capture a still as outlined in the previous two sections.  
~
~
"Capturing Still Frames from the Background Input" on page 117.  
"Capturing Still Frames from a PIP or Key" on page 118.  
Do not execute the next step during live production. All  
controls will be locked during the "save" process. It is  
recommended that you save stills during pre-production as a  
"setup" procedure.  
Warning  
2. On the Frame Grab Menu, press {SAVE} to save the captured frame into the  
selected permanent storage register (FG_1, FG_2 or FG_3). Once pressed, the  
screen will display an important warning:  
System controls will be locked  
for 2 to 3 minutes while saving.  
Save Now?  
Figure 6-2. Background Frame Save Warning  
~
~
Press YES to save the frame. All front panel controls will be locked for  
up to three minutes while the still frame is saved.  
Press NO to cancel the procedure.  
3. If required, press {DELETE} to delete the selected frame from permanent storage.  
This button only appears when frames are stored in permanent memory.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. Operations  
Capturing Still Frames  
120  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ  
This appendix provides detailed technical specifications for the PresentationPRO-II. The  
following topics are provided:  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Scaled Video Channel Input Specifications  
Unscaled Background/DSK Input Specifications  
Output Specifications  
User Control  
Physical and Electrical Specifications  
Communications Specifications  
Pinouts  
Input and Output Resolutions  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Scaled Video Channel Input Specifications  
pÅ~äÉÇ=sáÇÉç=`Ü~ååÉä=fåéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II scaled video channel input specifications.  
Table A-1. PresentationPRO-II Scaled Video Channel Input Specifications  
Parameter  
Input Types  
Specification  
Analog inputs (8) on 15-pin HD connectors  
• RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB computer video  
• YPbPr video (SD or HD)  
• S-video or composite video  
• On SDI Model, (1) SD-SDI Input on BNC Connector, per SMPTE  
259M-C (NTSC / PAL resolution)  
• On HD Model, (1) SD-SDI/HD-SDI Input on BNC Connector, per  
SMPTE 259M-C (NTSC / PAL resolution), SMPTE 292M (HDTV)  
Input Resolutions  
• PAL or NTSC  
• Computer resolutions VGA (640 x 480) through UXGA (1600 x 1200)  
• HDTV resolutions up to 1920 x 1080 (720p, 1080i, 1080p)  
• Plasma display resolutions  
råëÅ~äÉÇ=_~ÅâÖêçìåÇLaph=fåéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II unscaled background/DSK input specifications.  
Table A-1. PresentationPRO-II Unscaled Background/DSK Input Specifications  
Parameter  
Input Types  
Input Resolutions  
Specification  
DVI Digital Input — per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector  
(Recommendation) Input resolution should be the same as the selected  
output resolution.  
122  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Output Specifications  
lìíéìí=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II output specifications.  
Table A-2. PresentationPRO-II Output Specifications  
Parameter Specification  
Analog Output  
RGBHV / RGBS / RGsB (non-interlaced only) on 15-pin HD connector  
Digital DVI per DDWG 1.0 on DVI-I connector  
Digital Output  
Output Resolutions  
• Computer resolutions VGA (640 x 480) through UXGA (1600 x 1200)  
• HDTV resolutions, progressive up to 1920 x 1080 (1080p)  
• Plasma display resolutions  
rëÉê=`çåíêçä=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II user control specifications.  
Table A-3. PresentationPRO-II User Control Specifications  
Parameter  
Front Panel Control  
Remote Control  
Specification  
LCD Touch Screen, rotary encoders and LED lighted push buttons.  
The unit may be controlled from a computer or external controller via  
LAN, or an RS-232 serial link.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Physical and Electrical Specifications  
mÜóëáÅ~ä=~åÇ=bäÉÅíêáÅ~ä=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II physical and electrical specifications.  
Table A-4. PresentationPRO-II Physical and Electrical Specifications  
Parameter  
Specification  
120-240 VAC - 50/60 Hz., Auto-selecting 1.0A maximum  
2 RU Rackmount Chassis  
Power  
Mechanical  
H: 3.5 inches (8.89 cm)  
W: 17.00 inches (43.18 cm)  
D: 15.00 inches (38.10 cm)  
16.8 lbs (7.62 kg)  
Weight  
Temperature  
Humidity  
0-40 degrees C  
0-95% non-condensing  
`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë=péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë=  
The table below lists PresentationPRO-II communications specifications.  
Table A-5. PresentationPRO-II Communications Specifications  
Parameter Specification  
RS-232  
Ethernet  
DB-9 Female, DCE, 115k Baud  
RJ-45, 10/100 Mbps Autosense  
124  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Pinouts  
máåçìíë=  
The following topics are discussed in this section:  
•
•
•
•
DVI Connector Pinouts  
Analog 15-pin D Connector  
Ethernet Connector  
Serial Connector  
asf=`çååÉÅíçê=máåçìíë  
The figure below illustrates the DVI connector:  
1
8
9
17  
24  
Figure A-1. DVI Connector  
The table below lists DVI Connector pinouts. Please note:  
•
•
T.M.D.S = Transition Minimized Differential Signal  
DDC = Display Data Channel  
Table A-6. DVI Connector Pinouts  
Pin Signal  
T.M.D.S. Data 2-  
Pin  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
Signal  
1
T.M.D.S. Data 3+  
2
T.M.D.S. Data 2+  
T.M.D.S. Data 2/4 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data 4-  
T.M.D.S. Data 4+  
DDC Clock  
+5V Power  
3
ground (for +5V)  
Hot Plug Detect  
T.M.D.S. Data 0-  
T.M.D.S. Data 0+  
T.M.D.S. Data 0/5 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data 5-  
T.M.D.S. Data 5+  
T.M.D.S. Clock Shield  
T.M.D.S. Clock +  
T.M.D.S. Clock -  
4
5
6
7
DDC Data  
8
Analog Vertical Sync  
T.M.D.S. Data 1-  
T.M.D.S. Data 1+  
T.M.D.S. Data 1/3 Shield  
T.M.D.S. Data 3-  
9
10  
11  
12  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Pinouts  
^å~äçÖ=NRJéáå=a=`çååÉÅíçê  
The figure below illustrates the analog 15-pin D connector:  
5
1
10  
6
15  
11  
Figure A-2. Analog 15-pin D Connector  
The table below lists Analog 15-pin D connector pinouts.  
Table A-7. Analog 15-pin D Connector Pinouts  
Pin  
Signal  
Pin  
Signal  
1
Red  
9
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Green  
Blue  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
GND  
H Sync or C Sync  
V Sync  
Red return  
Green return  
Blue return  
Note that each analog input connector accepts a variety of analog formats including VGA,  
low-resolution composite video, S-video and YUV component video.  
•
•
For RGB with H and V sync, use the VGA connector directly.  
Using a (customer supplied) VGA to 5xBNC breakout cable, five input  
combinations are possible. Cells with check marks denote the connections  
required for the indicated format.  
Table A-8. Analog Input Combinations using Breakout Cable  
Breakout Cable  
Wire Color  
Composite  
Video  
S-Video  
(Y/C)  
YUV  
(YPbPr)  
RGB  
Sync on Green  
RGB  
Comp Sync  
RGB  
Separate H V  
R
3 (Pr)  
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 (Chrom)  
3 (Lum)  
G
3 (Lum)  
3 (Pb)  
3
3
B
3
3
3
3
3
H Sync  
V Sync  
126  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Pinouts  
bíÜÉêåÉí=`çååÉÅíçê  
The figure below illustrates the Ethernet connector:  
1
8
Figure A-3. Ethernet Connector  
The table below lists Ethernet connector pinouts.  
Table A-9. Ethernet Connector Pinouts  
Pin  
Signal  
Wire Color  
1
TX Data +  
TX Data -  
RX Data +  
White / Orange  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Orange  
White / Green  
Blue  
White / Blue  
Green  
RX Data -  
White / Brown  
Brown  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Pinouts  
pÉêá~ä=`çååÉÅíçê  
The figure below illustrates the Serial connector:  
1
5
6
9
Figure A-4. Serial Connector  
The table below lists Serial connector pinouts.  
Table A-10. Serial Connector Pinouts  
Pin  
RS-232 Signal  
Description  
Carrier Detect  
1
CD  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
RXD  
TXD  
DTR  
GND  
DSR  
RTS  
CTS  
RI  
Received Data  
Transmitted Data  
Data Terminal Ready  
Signal Ground  
Data Set Ready  
Request To Send  
Clear To Send  
Unused  
128  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Input and Output Resolutions  
fåéìí=~åÇ=lìíéìí=oÉëçäìíáçåë  
This section provides a comprehensive list of available input and output resolutions, which  
you can assign to the selected input on the Input Menu, and as the system’s output format  
on the Output Menu In Chapter 4, refer to the “Input Menu Description” and “Output  
Menu Description” sections for details.  
Please contact Barco Technical Support if you would like to  
request the addition of a new resolution.  
Note  
Input and output resolutions are listed below. Each entry lists Format @Fv (Hz).  
PresentationPRO-II does not support interlaced output  
resolutions. All interlaced video formats listed below are  
supported as inputs only, and noted as such in red.  
Important  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NTSC (480i) (Input Only)  
720x480p  
PAL (576i) (Input Only)  
720x575p  
640x480 @59.94  
640x480 @60  
640x480 @72  
640x480 @75  
640x480 @85  
800x600 @50  
800x600 @56  
800x600 @59.94  
800x600 @60  
800x600 @72  
800x600 @75  
800x600 @85  
1024x768 @47.95  
1024x768 @48  
1024x768 @50  
1024x768 @59.94  
1024x768 @60  
1024x768 @70  
1024x768 @71.93  
1024x768 @72  
1024x768 @75  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Input and Output Resolutions  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1024x768 @85  
1152x864 @75  
1280x768 @47.95  
1280x768 @48  
1280x768 @50  
1280x768 @59.94  
1280x768 @75  
1280x960 @50  
1280x960 @59.94  
1280x960 @60  
1280x960 @85  
1280x1024 @47.95  
1280x1024 @48  
1280x1024 @50  
1280x1024 @59.94  
1280x1024 @60  
1280x1024 @71.93  
1280x1024 @72  
1280x1024 @75  
1280x1024 @85  
1364x768 @47.95  
1364x768 @48  
1364x768 @50  
1364x768 @59.94  
1364x768 @75  
1364x1024 @47.95  
1364x1024 @48  
1364x1024 @50  
1364x1024 @59.94  
1364x1024 @75  
1400x1050 @48  
1400x1050 @50  
1400x1050 @59.94  
1400x1050 @60  
1400x1050 @75  
1680x1050 @60  
1600x1200 @47.95  
1600x1200 @48  
1600x1200 @50  
130  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Input and Output Resolutions  
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
1600x1200 @59.94  
1600x1200 @60  
1280x720p @50  
1280x720p @59.94  
1280x720p @60  
1920x1080p @23.98  
1920x1080p @24  
1920x1080p @25  
1920x1080p @29.97  
1920x1080p @30  
1920x1080p @50  
1920x1080p @59.94  
1920x1080p @60  
1920x1080sF @23.98  
1920x1080sF @24  
1920x1080i @50 (Input Only)  
1920x1080i @59.94 (Input Only)  
1920x1080i @60 (Input Only)  
XLM 2K @59.94  
XLM 2K @60  
2048x1080p @50  
2048x1080p @59.94  
2048x1080p @60  
1920x1200p @60  
Apple 1200p @60  
875p  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
^K==péÉÅáÑáÅ~íáçåë  
Input and Output Resolutions  
132  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
_K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå  
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ  
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:  
Warranty  
Return Material Authorization (RMA)  
Contact Information  
•
•
•
t~êê~åíó  
All video products are designed and tested to the highest quality standards and are backed  
by a full 3-year parts and labor warranty. Warranties are effective upon delivery date to  
customer and are non-transferable. Barco warranties are only valid to the original  
purchaser/owner. Warranty related repairs include parts and labor, but do not include faults  
resulting from user negligence, special modifications, lightning strikes, abuse (drop/crush),  
and/or other unusual damages.  
The customer shall pay shipping charges when unit is returned for repair. Barco will cover  
shipping charges for return shipments to customers.  
oÉíìêå=j~íÉêá~ä=^ìíÜçêáò~íáçå=Eoj^F  
In the unlikely event that a product is required to return for repair, please call the Technical  
Support / Customer Service direct line, and ask to receive a Return Merchandise  
Authorization number (RMA).  
•
(866) 374-7878  
RMA Conditions are listed below:  
a. Prior to returning any item, you must receive a Return Merchandise  
Authorization (RMA) number.  
b. All RMA numbers must appear on their return-shipping label.  
c. RMA numbers are valid for ten (10) days from issue date.  
d. All shipping and insurance charges on all RMAs must be prepaid by the  
customer  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
_K==`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå  
Contact Information  
`çåí~Åí=fåÑçêã~íáçå  
Barco Events USA/Barco Folsom, LLC  
11101 Trade Center Drive  
Rancho Cordova, California 95670  
USA  
•
•
•
Phone: (916) 859-2500  
Fax: (916) 859-2515  
Websites:  
~
~
www.folsom.com  
www.events.barco.com  
Sales Contact Information  
•
•
•
Direct: (916) 859-2505  
Toll Free: (888) 414-7226  
E-mail: [email protected]  
Barco N.V.  
Noordlaan 5  
8520 Kuurne  
BELGIUM  
•
•
•
Phone: +32 56.36.82.11  
Fax: +32 56.35.16.51  
Website: www.events.barco.com  
Technical Support / Customer Service Information  
•
•
Tech Line: (866) 374-7878 — 24 hours per day, 7 days per week  
E-mail: [email protected]  
134  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
få=qÜáë=^ééÉåÇáñ  
The following topics are discussed in this Appendix:  
Software Upgrade Overview  
Serial Upgrade Method  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
•
•
•
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Software Upgrade Overview  
pçÑíï~êÉ=réÖê~ÇÉ=lîÉêîáÉï  
Firmware files for the PresentationPRO-II system are loaded into the hardware at power-  
up. These files are stored in the unit’s onboard flash memory, which can be accessed by  
using one of the following two methods:  
•
Serial — this method is the easiest to set up and use. The PC connection is  
made through the Serial 1 port on the PresentationPRO-II rear panel, in  
conjunction with the “Flash Loader” utility supplied with each upgrade.  
•
Ethernet — this method uses the rear panel’s Ethernet port in conjunction with a  
small network consisting of a PC (or Laptop), a network hub and the  
PresentationPRO-II unit. However, this method still requires a serial port to be  
connected.  
The Ethernet method is twice as fast as the Serial method.  
Using Serial takes approximately 6 minutes, while using  
Ethernet takes approximately 3 minutes.  
Note  
The Flash Loader utility enables you to update the Flash memory with the latest software  
revision. The utility should be run from a PC’s hard drive (recommended).  
Each upgrade method is discussed in the following sections:  
•
•
Serial Upgrade Method  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
pÉêá~ä=réÖê~ÇÉ=jÉíÜçÇ  
„
Use the following steps to upgrade PresentationPRO-II software using a serial  
connection to your PC:  
1. Ensure that your PC (or laptop) uses the Windows® 2000 or XP operating  
systems.  
2. Ensure that your PC (or laptop) has RS-232 Serial Terminal software installed,  
such as HyperTerminal. This software enables the PC to send serial commands  
to the PresentationPRO-II unit.  
3. Download the latest PresentationPRO-II firmware update from the web:  
a. On the web, navigate to http://video.folsom.com.  
b. Click “Downloads” to access the Downloads Page.  
c. Using the “Select Video Product” pull-down menu, click  
PresentationPRO-II.  
d. In the “Software” section, click the Download button for the latest  
version of code.  
e. When the File Download Dialog appears, click Save to save the file to  
your computer.  
f. When the Save As Dialog appears, navigate to the desired folder (or  
create a new one) and click Save.  
136  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Serial Upgrade Method  
g. After the download is complete, navigate to the target folder and double-  
click the EXE to launch the installation shield.  
h. Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package in the desired folder.  
Note that at the conclusion of the procedure, a new path will be created  
under Start > Programs > Barco Folsom.  
Do not move or copy any files out of the target folder.  
Note  
4. Connect the Serial 1 port on the back of the PresentationPRO-II to the COM 1  
port on your PC. In Chapter 2, refer to the “PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel”  
section on page 12 for the location of the Serial 1 port.  
5. Power-up the PresentationPRO-II.  
6. On the PC, click Start > Programs > Barco Folsom > PresentationPRO-II  
Software > PresentationPRO-II Flash Loader to launch the Flash Loader utility,  
as shown below.  
Figure C-1. Flash Loader Utility  
If you have not used the COM 1 port on your PC, an error  
message will be shown at the bottom of the Flash Loader.  
Note  
7. Click Communication > RS232 Config > Baud, and select 115200.  
8. Click Communication > RS232 Config > COM Port, and select the COM port on  
your PC to which the PresentationPRO-II is connected. If no other programs are  
using the port, the “Established communications” message appears at the  
bottom of the Flash Loader.  
9. To verify communications between the PC and the PresentationPRO-II unit:  
a. In the loader program, click in the black terminal window area.  
b. Note the condition of the status lights:  
•
DCD and CTS should be red.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Serial Upgrade Method  
•
TXD and RXD should be green. They will flash if Enter is  
pressed.  
Figure C-2. Flash Loader Status Lights, Normal Condition  
c. Press Enter a few times to display the system prompt “#” on screen.  
d. If the prompt does not appear, continue with step 10 (troubleshooting).  
e. If the prompt appears, continue with step 11 (uploading files).  
10. To troubleshoot the serial connection:  
a. If the DCD and CTS status lights are green, re-check the communication  
settings in the loader, and verify that the COM port and Baud Rate  
settings are correct.  
b. To verify PresentationPRO-II communication settings, on the front panel  
of the PresentationPRO-II unit press {HOME} > {SYSTEM} >  
{CONSOLE} to display the Console Port Setup Menu.  
CONSOLE PORT SETUP  
H
O
M
E
Baud Rate  
115200  
N
A
V
Data Bits  
Parity  
8
NONE  
1
B
A
C
K
Stop Bits  
A
D
J
Figure C-3. Console Port Setup Menu (sample)  
c. On the menu, ensure that the following settings are selected:  
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate = 115200  
Data Bits = 8  
Parity = NONE  
Stop Bits = 1  
d. Repeat steps 7 and 8 above, then re-check the status lights.  
e. With communication status OK, continue with step 11.  
11. To upload files to the PresentationPRO-II unit, click the "Open script file to read  
and upload" button.  
12. In the dialog, select "Upload_All.sld" and click Open. The PresentationPRO-II  
unit should immediately display the "System in LOADER MODE" message.  
138  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
13. It takes approximately 6 minutes to load the flash memory using the Serial  
method. When complete, the Flash Loader utility displays the “Upload  
Complete” message. Click OK to continue.  
14. Cycle power on the PresentationPRO-II unit, and exit the Flash Loader utility.  
15. On PresentationPRO-II, perform a factory reset.  
Use caution when performing this step, as all saved files and  
saved still frames will be erased.  
Warning  
a. From the Home Menu, press {SYSTEM} to access the System Menu.  
b. From the System Menu, press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu.  
c. On the Reset Type line, select FACTORY.  
d. Press {RESET}. When the confirmation screen appears, press {YES} to  
reset the system to factory default values.  
16. On PresentationPRO-II, verify that the new software has been loaded correctly:  
a. From the Home Menu, press {SYSTEM} to access the System Menu.  
b. From the System Menu, press {SW VER} to display the Software  
Version Menu, then verify the new version.  
bíÜÉêåÉí=réÖê~ÇÉ=jÉíÜçÇ  
„
Use the following steps to upgrade PresentationPRO-II software using an Ethernet  
connection to your PC:  
1. Ensure that your PC (or laptop) uses the Windows® 2000 or XP operating  
systems.  
2. Ensure that your PC (or laptop) has RS-232 Serial Terminal software installed,  
such as HyperTerminal. This software enables the PC to send serial commands  
to the PresentationPRO-II unit.  
3. Please note the following important points:  
~
Do not connect PresentationPRO-II to a Local Area Network (LAN) with  
an existing DHCP server running.  
~
The factory default IP address for the PresentationPRO-II system is  
192.168.0.10, so the PC will use 192.168.0.191 as its IP address.  
4. Download the latest PresentationPRO-II firmware update from the web:  
a. On the web, navigate to http://video.folsom.com.  
b. Click “Downloads” to access the Downloads Page.  
c. Using the “Select Video Product” pull-down menu, click  
PresentationPRO-II.  
d. In the “Software” section, click the Download button for the latest  
version of code.  
e. When the File Download Dialog appears, click Save to save the file to  
your computer.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
f. When the Save As Dialog appears, navigate to the desired folder (or  
create a new one) and click Save.  
g. After the download is complete, navigate to the target folder and double-  
click the EXE to launch the installation shield.  
h. Follow the prompts to install the upgrade package in the desired folder.  
Note that at the conclusion of the procedure, a new path will be created  
under Start > Programs > Barco Folsom.  
Do not move or copy any files out of the target folder.  
Note  
5. Configure a small network system consisting of a Hub, the PresentationPRO-II  
and your PC (or laptop). Use the diagram below for reference.  
Laptop  
PresentationPRO-II  
Ethernet Hub / Switch  
Figure C-4. Small Ethernet Network  
Do not connect this small network to any other network.  
Note  
6. Connect the Serial 1 port on the back of the PresentationPRO-II to the COM 1  
port on your PC. In Chapter 2, refer to the “PresentationPRO-II Rear Panel”  
section on page 12 for the location of the Serial 1 port.  
7. Power-up the PresentationPRO-II and the Hub.  
8. To assign a static IP address to the PC (or laptop), on the PC, click Start >  
Settings > Control Panel to display the Control Panel Window.  
9. Double-click the Network and Dial-up Connections icon to display the Network  
and Dial-up Connections Window.  
140  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
10. Note the status of the Local Area Connection, as shown below.  
Figure C-5. Network and Dial-up Connections Window (sample)  
~
~
If the status is “disabled,” contact your network administrator.  
If the status is “enabled,” right click on the Local Area Connection label  
and select Properties from the pop-up menu.  
The Local Area Connection Properties Window appears:  
Figure C-6. Local Area Connection Properties Window (sample)  
11. Ensure that the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) check box is checked.  
12. Click the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) line to highlight it, then click the Properties  
button to display the Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
13. Check the “Use the following IP address” check box, as shown below.  
Figure C-7. Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties Dialog (sample)  
14. Set the IP Address to 192.168.0.191.  
The static IP address shown above is within the unit’s user-  
Note  
defined IP address range. If this address has already been  
assigned to another device, select a different IP address  
within the following range: 192.168.0.191 → 192.168.0.240.  
15. Set the Subnet Mask to 255.255.255.0.  
16. Set the Default Gateway to 192.168.0.1.  
17. When complete, click OK to close the dialog, then click OK to close the Local  
Area Connection Properties Window.  
18. (Optional). Click Start > Run to display the Run Dialog.  
a. In the Open field, type cmd, then click OK to open a DOS command  
window.  
b. In the DOS command window, type ipconfig, and verify that the new IP  
address is correct.  
c. Close the DOS command window.  
142  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
19. To connect to the PresentationPRO-II serial port:  
a. Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >  
HyperTerminal to launch the HyperTerminal application.  
b. In the Connection Description dialog, enter a connection name,  
choose an icon, and click OK.  
c. In the Connect To dialog, click the Connect using pull-down menu, and  
choose COM 1.  
d. Click OK to display the COM 1 Properties dialog.  
e. Select the following settings:  
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate = 115200  
Data Bits = 8  
Parity = NONE  
Stop Bits = 1  
20. In the terminal window, ensure that the # prompt is displayed, then type:  
LOADR  
.... and wait a few seconds for the > prompt.  
21. In the terminal window, type:  
DHCP 0  
You might have to wait 10 seconds, until it binds to 192.168.0.10.  
22. On the PC, click Start > Programs > Barco Folsom > PresentationPRO-II  
Software > PresentationPRO-II Flash Loader to launch the Flash Loader utility,  
as shown below.  
Figure C-8. Flash Loader Utility  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
23. Click Communication > Ethernet > Connect to display the Ethernet  
Connection dialog.  
Figure C-9. Ethernet Connection Dialog (sample)  
If the Ethernet menu pick is grayed out, set the COM port to  
None.  
Note  
24. In the dialog, enter the IP address of the PresentationPRO-II: 192.168.0.10. The  
default port number is 3000.  
25. Click the Connect button. If the connection is successfully established, the  
message “Connect via Ethernet successful” will be shown in the Status Bar. If  
you cannot connect, refer to the “Troubleshooting Ethernet Communications”  
section on page 145 for instructions.  
26. To upload files to the PresentationPRO-II unit, click the "Open script file to read  
and upload" button.  
27. In the dialog, select "Upload_All.sld" and click Open. The flash loader echoes  
commands while the flash is being loaded.  
28. It takes approximately three minutes to load the flash memory using the Ethernet  
method. When complete, the Flash Loader utility displays the “Upload  
Complete” message. Click OK to continue.  
29. Cycle power on the PresentationPRO-II unit, and exit the Flash Loader utility.  
30. On PresentationPRO-II, perform a factory reset:  
Use caution when performing this step, as all saved files and  
saved still frames will be erased.  
Warning  
a. From the Home Menu, press {SYSTEM} to access the System Menu.  
b. From the System Menu, press {RESET} to display the Reset Menu.  
c. On the Reset Type line, select FACTORY.  
d. Press {RESET}. When the confirmation screen appears, press {YES} to  
reset the system to factory default values.  
31. On PresentationPRO-II, verify that the new software has been loaded correctly:  
a. From the Home Menu, press {SYSTEM} to access the System Menu.  
b. From the System Menu, press {SW VER} to display the Software  
Version Menu, then verify the new version.  
144  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
qêçìÄäÉëÜççíáåÖ=bíÜÉêåÉí=`çããìåáÅ~íáçåë  
„
Use the following steps to determine the IP address of the PresentationPRO-II, and  
establish proper communications:  
1. The default IP address for the PresentationPRO-II unit is 192.168.0.10. To verify  
that this is the correct address, open the terminal program and create a serial  
communication link to the PresentationPRO-II:  
a. Click Start > Programs > Accessories > Communications >  
HyperTerminal to launch the HyperTerminal application.  
b. In the Connection Description dialog, enter a connection name,  
choose an icon, and click OK.  
c. In the Connect To dialog, click the Connect using pull-down menu, and  
choose COM 1.  
d. Click OK to display the COM 1 Properties dialog.  
e. Select the following settings:  
•
•
•
•
•
Baud Rate = 115200  
Data Bits = 8  
Parity = NONE  
Stop Bits = 1  
Flow Control = hardware/software  
2. Turn on the PresentationPRO-II.  
3. In the terminal window, type:  
IPINFO  
(or SETif in the loader)  
4. Verify that the following message is displayed:  
#ipinfo  
Server running  
IP Address 192.168.0.10  
Listen Port 3000  
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0  
DHCP CLIENT  
DHCP Srvr IP Addr 192.168.0.11  
DHCP Srvr IP Count 180  
Static IP Address 192.168.0.10  
The exact static IP Address may differ.  
Note  
5. Ensure that Ethernet is connected from the PC to the hub (to which  
PresentationPRO-II is connected).  
6. Open a DOS command window on the PC:  
a. Click Start > Run to display the Run Dialog.  
b. In the Open field, type cmd, then click OK to open a DOS command  
window.  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
`K==réÖê~ÇáåÖ=pçÑíï~êÉ  
Ethernet Upgrade Method  
7. In the DOS command window, type:  
ping 192.168.0.10  
... and press Enter.  
Use the unit’s actual IP address, as determined in step 4  
above.  
Note  
~
~
If the computer is able to successfully communicate with the  
PresentationPRO-II, you will see a series of “replies” from the target IP  
address.  
If you see a “Request timed out” message, the PC is unable to locate  
and communicate with the PresentationPRO-II. If this is the case:  
•
Check your network connections and settings as described  
above, or ...  
•
Contact your network administrator.  
8. With communications established, to find the current software revision:  
a. Open the terminal program and create a serial communication link to the  
PresentationPRO-II unit.  
b. At the PresentationPRO-II command prompt, type:  
rev  
... and press Enter.  
146  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
fåÇÉñ  
{TRACK RGB} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
{TRACK SIZE} . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 61, 62, 69, 73  
{V SIZE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70  
ô=jÉåì=_ìííçåë=õ  
{AR} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 38  
{BORDER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 60, 61, 63  
{CAPTURE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
{CFG} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 34  
{COLOR BALANCE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 37  
{CONSOLE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 50, 138  
{CROP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 61, 67  
{DELETE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 81  
{DIAG} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 45  
{EDID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 51  
{EFX} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 63  
{EXIT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
{FORCE ACQUIRE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 77  
{FRAME GRAB} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77, 81  
{INPUT SETUP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
{INPUT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 33  
{KEY DETECT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45, 47  
{LCD CAL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
{LIGHT ADJUST} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55, 56  
{MATTE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 79  
{NEXT IP QUAD} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
{OUTPUT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
{PIP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
{PROGRAM EDID} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
{REMOTE CONTROL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
{RESET ALL} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
{RESET RGB} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
{RESET} . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 48, 55, 87, 139, 144  
{ROTARY ENCODER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
{SAVE} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 35  
{SELECT FORMAT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 32, 40  
{SET IP} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
{SETTINGS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 41  
{SHADOW} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60, 62  
{SIZE & POS} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67, 69  
{SIZING} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32, 35  
{SRC} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59, 61, 72  
{START LED TEST} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
{SW VER} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 49, 139, 144  
{SYSTEM} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
{TECH SUPPORT} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44, 52  
{TEST PATTERN} . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40, 42  
kìãÉêáÅë  
1-1 Sampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 35  
1-1 Sizing Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
^
AC connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Acrobat usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Adapter information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Address, company . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii  
Analog  
15-pin D connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . .126  
input flexibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Aspect ratio  
custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38, 61  
_
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
LOS (loss of signal) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
matte menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
setup, DVI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
setup, matte color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
setup, still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Background/DSK  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Index  
input setup menu functions . . . . . . . . . . .76  
Clock Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Color  
input setup menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74  
Backlight, buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
Baud Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
BG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
BG/DSK  
balance menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 40  
Communications specifications . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Company address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii  
Configuration  
monitor layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Connector  
analog 15-pin D pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . .126  
DVI pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Ethernet pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
serial pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
Console port setup menu description . . . . . . .50  
Contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
sales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Contrast . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 55  
Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii  
Crop  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
button usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
cancel BG or DSK transition . . . . . . . . . . 111  
clear BG or DSK from program . . . . . . .112  
input setup menu functions . . . . . . . . . . .76  
key DVI source in DSK mode . . . . . . . . .110  
key still frame in DSK mode . . . . . . . . . .110  
mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
set background mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
setup menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
transition to live DVI background . . . . . .109  
transition to matte color . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
transition to still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
Black LOGO source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
Block diagram, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
Blue  
contrast and brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 78  
Border menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 55  
Burst test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Bus source selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Button  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
Custom aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
Customer service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
BG/DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
CLEAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
color, use of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
FREEZE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
FULL SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
RESET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
TRANS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
a
Data bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Delete frame from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Description  
layer functions section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
source selection bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
touch screen menu section . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Destination, remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Diagnostics setup menu description . . . . . . . .45  
Digital program output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Display  
`
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
settings menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
Documentation  
conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
DSK  
Cable information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23  
Calibration, touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 87  
Capture  
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
still frames . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80, 117  
Change history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi  
Chapter structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1  
Chart, input connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
Chassis handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
CLEAR button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
adjustment menu functions . . . . . . . . . . .78  
clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
fill source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
invert mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
key type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
148  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
matte adjustment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79  
opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
setup, DVI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
setup, still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
DVI connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Front panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
FULL SCREEN  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
d
b
Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Gamma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 41  
Global rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Green  
contrast and brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 77  
Guarantee and compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii  
Edge, wipe transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
EDID  
DVI input format menu description . . . . . .51  
format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Effects  
combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Electrical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Equipment  
e
list, installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
marking terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v  
Ethernet  
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
Extended Display Identification Data . . . . . . . .51  
H Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
H Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
H Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
H Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 58  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
H Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 61  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
H Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Handles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11  
installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
HD-SDI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
History, change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi  
Home menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
How to  
c
Factory  
default, return to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
FCC statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii  
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
FG to Capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
FG_1, FG_2 and FG_3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 110  
File  
name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
Fill Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Force acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30, 40  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51  
Frame grab  
calibrate touch screen . . . . . . . . . . .87, 101  
cancel BG or DSK transition . . . . . . . . . . 111  
cancel Key transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
cancel PIP transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
capture still frame from PIP or Key . . . . . 118  
capture still from background input . . . . 117  
change Key to PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
change PIP to Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
clear BG or DSK from program . . . . . . . 112  
clear LOGO from program . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
key DVI source in DSK mode . . . . . . . . . 110  
key still frame in DSK mode . . . . . . . . . . 110  
modify keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
modify PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
perform a mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
perform a wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
perform quick input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
save frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
FREEZE  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
program EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Inputs  
reestablish local control . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
remove Key from program . . . . . . . . . . .106  
remove PIP from program . . . . . . . . . . .103  
return to factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
save set up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
save still frame in permanent memory . .119  
set background mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
set up DVI input as background . . . . . . . .94  
set up DVI input as DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
set up LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
set up matte color as background . . . . . .94  
set up output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
set up projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
set up still frame as background . . . . . . . .95  
set up still frame as DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
setup inputs, comprehensive . . . . . . . . . .90  
transition Key to program . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
transition LOGO to program . . . . . . . . . .113  
transition PIP to program . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
transition to live DVI background . . . . . .109  
transition to matte color . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
transition to still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
use freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
use full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
use remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
use reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
use this guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
work with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Hue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37, 64  
Hyperlinks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
background and DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Installation  
block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
equipment list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25  
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21  
rack-mount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
unpacking and inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Interval (frames), strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Invert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66, 78  
IP address, set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
h
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
adjustment menu description . . . . . . . . . .69  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
cancel transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
change to PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
detect menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
modifying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
remove from program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
sub menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
transition to program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
Keying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5  
Keypad backlight menu description . . . . . . . . .56  
Knobs, rotary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
f
ID, unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
Image effects menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
Information, cables and adapters . . . . . . . . . .23  
Input  
acquisition menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
configuration menu description . . . . . . . .34  
connection chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24  
flexibility, analog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14  
HD-SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
menu functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
pre and sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
resolution specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
SD-SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
setup prerequisites, comprehensive . . . . .90  
setup prerequisites, quick . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
source adjustment menu description . . . .72  
source adjustment menu functions . . . . . .72  
source adjustment menu tree . . . . . . . . . .71  
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
sync type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
i
Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
functions section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
functions section, description . . . . . . . . . .19  
functions, working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6  
working with . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
clear from program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
input setup menu description . . . . . . . . . .82  
input setup menu functions . . . . . . . . . . .82  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
source black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
transition to program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
150  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Menu functions  
LOS  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
loss of signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
background/DSK input setup . . . . . . . . . .76  
BG/DSK input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
DSK adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
LOGO input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
Loss of signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
j
Menu tree  
background/DSK input setup . . . . . . . . . .74  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
Mismatch, video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
Mix  
Matte  
fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
Memory  
permanent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
temporary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
input acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Menu description  
how to perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Mode  
aspect ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38  
background matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77  
BG/DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
color balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
console port setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
crop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61  
diagnostics setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55  
EDID DVI input format menu . . . . . . . . . .51  
effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
frame grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
image effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30  
input configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
key adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
key detect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47  
keypad backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56  
LOGO input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
oversample sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58  
remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 87, 139, 144  
rotary encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
sizing menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
software version . . . . . . . . . . . .49, 139, 144  
status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
technical support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75  
monochrome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Model  
HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
SDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
SDI or HD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Monitor layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Monochrome mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .63  
k
Notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ii  
NVRAM Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
l
Opacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99  
cancel BG or DSK transition . . . . . . . . . . 111  
cancel Key transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
cancel PIP transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
change Key to PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106  
change PIP to Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
clear BG or DSK from program . . . . . . . 112  
clear LOGO from program . . . . . . . . . . . 113  
configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
key DVI source in DSK mode . . . . . . . . . 110  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
key still frame in DSK mode . . . . . . . . . .110  
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
adjustment menu description . . . . . . . . . .58  
adjustment menu functions . . . . . . . . . . .58  
adjustment menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .57  
adjustment sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19  
cancel transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
change to Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
how to modify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
remove from program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103  
transition to program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Power connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
Pre menus, input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
Prerequisites, operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
Priority  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
PIP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7  
Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Product models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Program outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Programming EDID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
Projector  
modify PIPs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104  
modifying keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107  
prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100  
remove Key from program . . . . . . . . . . .106  
remove PIP from program . . . . . . . . . . .103  
set background mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108  
transition Key to program . . . . . . . . . . . .105  
transition LOGO to program . . . . . . . . . .113  
transition PIP to program . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
transition to live DVI background . . . . . .109  
transition to matte color . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
transition to still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109  
using freeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
using full screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
using reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114  
working with layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102  
Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Operators safety summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv  
Orientation  
hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11  
menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27  
Output  
analog program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
digital program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39  
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
resolution specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . .129  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
sub menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Oversample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31, 35  
sizing menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36  
Overview  
frame rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
Pulldown Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
n
Quick input setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
o
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
Rack-mount installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Raster boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Rear panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Red  
contrast and brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
matte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68, 77  
Remote control  
enable, disable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Encore destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
router control, utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116  
Reset  
m
Panel  
front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Parity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
PDF file usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
navigating and searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Perm FG Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Permanent memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Physical specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
Picture-in-Picture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
analog 15-pin D connector . . . . . . . . . . .126  
DVI connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
Ethernet connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127  
serial connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
menu description . . . . . . . .48, 87, 139, 144  
rotary encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45  
soft or factory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48, 87, 139, 144  
using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114  
152  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
RESET button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Resolution specifications, input and output . .129  
Return material authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
RMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Rotary  
encoder menu description . . . . . . . . . . . .46  
knobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Router, utilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Rules, global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28  
Shadow menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Site preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Size specified in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Sizing menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Soft reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48  
Software  
version menu description . . . . . . . .139, 144  
Software version menu description . . . . . . . . .49  
SOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Source  
connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26  
selection bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
selection bus, description . . . . . . . . . . . . .18  
Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121  
communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122  
input and output resolutions . . . . . . . . . .129  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
physical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124  
pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125  
user control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Status menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54  
Still frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76, 80  
capture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117  
delete from memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Stop Bits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50  
Strobe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64  
Style, border . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60  
Sub menus  
input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
PIP adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59  
Support, technical information . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2  
Sync  
out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
slice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44  
menu tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43  
overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
p
Safety  
precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv  
Sales contact information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
Sampling Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31  
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37  
Save  
captured frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
Scaler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
LOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101  
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3  
SD-SDI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12  
Section  
layer functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
touch screen menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
Self fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67  
Serial  
connector pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128  
ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13  
Set IP address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Settings menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41  
Setup  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
DVI input as background . . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
DVI input as DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96  
input prerequisites, comprehensive . . . . .90  
input prerequisites, quick . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
inputs, quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89  
LODO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
matte color as background . . . . . . . . . . . .94  
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
projector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88  
return to factory default . . . . . . . . . . . . . .87  
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98  
still frame as background . . . . . . . . . . . . .95  
still frame as DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97  
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85  
q
Technical support  
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134  
menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52  
Temp FG Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81  
Temporary memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80  
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2, 3  
equipment marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .v  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Test  
V Total . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
Video mismatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33  
pattern menu description . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
pattern type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Touch screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3, 17  
calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26, 87, 101  
menu section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15  
menu section, description . . . . . . . . . . . . .17  
Trademarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii  
TRANS button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20  
Transition  
t
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133  
Wipe  
how to perform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115  
transition type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
mix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
Wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115  
Transparency, shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
Type  
background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
DSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78  
LOGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82  
test pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42  
Type, transition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53  
r
Unit  
ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83  
IP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84  
Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22  
Use of color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16  
User control, specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123  
Using remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116  
s
V Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35  
V Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .76  
V Pos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
V Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35, 58  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
V Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58, 61  
input source adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72  
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69  
shadow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62  
154  
PresentationPRO-II • User’s Guide  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Abocom Switch SW500B User Manual
ADC Network Router HDSL User Manual
Addonics Technologies Computer Hardware ADSAUSPCB User Manual
Agilent Technologies Portable Generator 08111 90002 User Manual
Agilent Technologies Stereo System N9030a User Manual
Alesis Stereo System DM8 User Manual
Alto Shaam Oven AR 7H ELECTRONIC CONTROL User Manual
Behringer Digital Camera BUC400 User Manual
Behringer Music Pedal SF300 User Manual
Eureka Tents Tent Backcountry 1 User Manual